<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl" media="screen" href="/~d/styles/atom10full.xsl"?><?xml-stylesheet type="text/css" media="screen" href="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~d/styles/itemcontent.css"?><feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:openSearch="http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearch/1.1/" xmlns:georss="http://www.georss.org/georss" xmlns:gd="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005" xmlns:thr="http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0" xmlns:feedburner="http://rssnamespace.org/feedburner/ext/1.0" gd:etag="W/&quot;DEEFQXY7fSp7ImA9WhRRFE4.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260</id><updated>2011-11-28T06:30:10.805+07:00</updated><category term="Project I" /><category term="General" /><category term="What is SketchUp" /><category term="Freebies" /><category term="Preparation" /><category term="Welcome" /><title>SketchUp Tutor</title><subtitle type="html">Sketch your floor plan and start 3D modeling</subtitle><link rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#feed" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/posts/default" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><generator version="7.00" uri="http://www.blogger.com">Blogger</generator><openSearch:totalResults>18</openSearch:totalResults><openSearch:startIndex>1</openSearch:startIndex><openSearch:itemsPerPage>25</openSearch:itemsPerPage><atom10:link xmlns:atom10="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://feeds.feedburner.com/SketchupTutor" /><feedburner:info uri="sketchuptutor" /><atom10:link xmlns:atom10="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" rel="hub" href="http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/" /><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DkIGQHc6cSp7ImA9Wx9REEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-6133009748077041322</id><published>2010-12-11T17:48:00.000+07:00</published><updated>2010-12-11T17:48:41.919+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-12-11T17:48:41.919+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Welcome" /><title>News and Update</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="border: 1px solid black; overflow: auto; height: 15em;"&gt;
&lt;table class="tabletwo"
style="border-collapse: collapse; height: 256px; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;December 11, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;There
are two tools that are very often used in Sketchup: the circle and arc
tool. A deeper discussion about these two tools is posted in &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/12/tool-time-circle-and-arc-tool.html"&gt;Tool
time: Circle and Arc Tool&lt;/a&gt;. This chapter also explains how to create
a 'perfect' arc, one that merges seamlessly with a line or another arc.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;December 4, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapter on "&lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/12/adding-roof-element.html"&gt;Adding
Roof Element&lt;/a&gt;" has been posted. Now the Project-One house final
shape is complete, ready for some finishing work.&amp;nbsp; However, I plan
to talk about some tools first before continuing with this project.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;November 21, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapter on "&lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/11/adding-interior-and-exterior-details.html"&gt;Adding
Interior and Exterior Details&lt;/a&gt;" has been posted. More to come.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;November 19, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Hello guys, sorry for not
updating the tutorial for more than eight months now. Google has
released a SketchUp version 8.0. (UN)Luckily, the update for the free
version is more toward
Google Earth modeling, which I don't plan to cover (at least for
now). Other than that, the rest is almost completely the same.&amp;nbsp;
Fix some links to accommodate the update, and plan to catch up. See you
soon. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;February 14, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;I have uploaded some &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/bathroom-components.html"&gt;bathroom
components&lt;/a&gt; to the 3d warehouse. We need these components for the
next lesson: "Adding Some Details"&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;February 7, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;We are now ready to &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/placing-windows.html"&gt;Place
all Windows&lt;/a&gt; to our windowless house.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;February 1, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Let's &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/adding-doors-to-our-3d-model.html"&gt;add
some doors&lt;/a&gt; to our 3D modeling&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;January 25, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Let's start our 3d modeling
tutorial by
creating a floor plan and make &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/making-walls-and-floors.html"&gt;walls
and floors&lt;/a&gt; from the plan.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 21, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 354px;"&gt;I have uploaded
three Dynamic Components to the 3d Warehouse. These are the first batch
of &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html"&gt;Quicky
Components&lt;/a&gt; that are essential for creating the 3d model in &lt;i&gt;Project
One&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 18, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 354px;"&gt;Need some time to
translate components with the right English terminology. &lt;br&gt;
Meanwhile you
may want to &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/prepare-yourself.html"&gt;check
your hardware and download some files&lt;/a&gt; to work with this tutorial.
Afterward, you can start &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/fresh-start.html"&gt;installing
and setting up&lt;/a&gt; your SketchUp and find out about our &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/projects.html"&gt;SketchUp
projects&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 17,
2010 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;I use SketchUp quite extensively
during the construction&amp;nbsp; my new house. &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/sketchup-in-home-building.html"&gt;This&lt;/a&gt;
may give you some ideas if you are planning or in the middle of
constructing or remodeling a house. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 14,
2010 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;More
translation of Section: Welcome and Introduction to SketchUp have been
posted. More are still to come. For the time being, you can browse: &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/improving-model-accurary.html"&gt;Improving
Model Accuracy&lt;/a&gt; and see an example of &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/two-bedroom-house-at-grand-wisata.html"&gt;a
SketchUp model&lt;/a&gt; I have created. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 13, 2010&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 354px;"&gt;Google issues
SketchUp
Release 7.1 Maintenance 2 (7.1.6860). It fixes some bugs, security
issues and some language interface.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 12,
2010 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;This Welcome page is first
posted. This blog is officially born. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;January 10,
2010 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;One Chapter per week target is
achieved,&amp;nbsp; The final Chapter of Project One of the &lt;a
href="http://sketchuptutor.blogspot.com/" target="_blank"&gt;Indonesian
version&lt;/a&gt; of this blog is completed and this English version is
started.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="dk"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;November 17,
2009 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;Google
issues SketchUp 7.1.6087.&amp;nbsp; Although this is a not a major update,
it has a better texture management for better spanning and orbiting
(But ... 3D import is missing). &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; width: 135px;"&gt;November 5,
2009 &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 354px;"&gt;&lt;a
href="http://sketchuptutor.blogspot.com/" target="_blank"&gt;SketchupTutor
blogspot&lt;/a&gt;, a sister site to this blog to born &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
&lt;span style="text-decoration: underline;"&gt;Welcome&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;This blog is not intended to discuss architecture but rather to
explore and learn an excellent yet free 3-D modeling software from
Google: SketchUp. However with its surprisingly ease of use, this
application might be just the one you need to reveal "&lt;i&gt;the architect
in you&lt;/i&gt;".&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The users of this Sketchup tutorial are absolute beginners who do
not have
prior knowledge
of any 3D modeling software or anyone else who wants to learn SketchUp
from square one.&amp;nbsp; What you need is just a general knowledge of
using Microsoft Window applications, a little bandwidth and a lot of
time to have fun. Anything else is free ...&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;This Sketchup tutorial blog is structured more like a book with &lt;i&gt;sections&lt;/i&gt;
and
&lt;i&gt;chapters&lt;/i&gt;,
than&amp;nbsp; journal like postings as you would see in a normal blog.
Therefore you can use this blog as you usually do when reading an
e-book. The main organization of this Sketchup tutorial is as follows: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Main Page&lt;/b&gt;. The Home page of
this
blog will always be this Welcome post. At the top of this page, news
regarding updates to this blog will be posted along with information
regarding SketchUp updates released by Google, or any news that I
believe is relevant to this blog readers.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;The Left column&lt;/b&gt;. The left column is the Table
of&amp;nbsp; Content of this &lt;i&gt;book&lt;/i&gt;, which will be divided into
Sections and Chapters. Except for the&amp;nbsp; first two sections (&lt;i&gt;Welcome&lt;/i&gt;
and &lt;i&gt;What is SketchUp&lt;/i&gt;)&lt;i&gt;, &lt;/i&gt;all&lt;i&gt; Sections&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;Chapters
are&lt;/i&gt;
designed as step-by-step tutorials and that are to be done in
sequential order as each chapter is started where previous chapter left
off. However, a link to a base model is provided at the beginning of
each chapter in case you want to start directly with the chapter. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;The right column&lt;/b&gt;. This column will contain a &lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;General&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt;
section. Here we will discus Tips &amp;amp; Trick and SketchUp techniques
which are too lengthy to be part of any of the chapters. Another
section&amp;nbsp; in this column is &lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;Freebies&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt;.
Every now and then I would post 3-D models and components that I have
created that might be of interest. &lt;br&gt;
Each posting in this column can be read separately since each is an
individual topic by itself. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;This is a "&lt;b&gt;show and tell&lt;/b&gt;" Sketchup tutorial. For each step
in the modeling process, there will be a general explanation in &lt;i&gt;how&lt;/i&gt;
and &lt;i&gt;what&lt;/i&gt;
tool you need to use to finish the step.&amp;nbsp; At the end of each step,
an animation is shown to have a clear understanding how it is done in
SkecthUp. I also provide you with a detailed list of steps taken in the
animation (especially in the first few chapters). In order not to
clutter the pages, these detailed steps are hidden until you click the
"Detailed Steps" button .&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;It is expected that by doing this Sketchup tutorial you can make 3d
model of
your current and/or planned home and.or can seek inspiration from
various
sources to put into your SketchUp model .&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;As I am also
writing a sister blog in &lt;a href="http://sketchuptutor.blogspot.com/"
target="_blank"&gt;Bahasa Indonesia&lt;/a&gt;, I hope this is not a way too
tall order. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Cheers,&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-6133009748077041322?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/MWVarbp6M3p9LISrn4nN_K5ROYw/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/MWVarbp6M3p9LISrn4nN_K5ROYw/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/MWVarbp6M3p9LISrn4nN_K5ROYw/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/MWVarbp6M3p9LISrn4nN_K5ROYw/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/MKG79PNOj0U" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/6133009748077041322/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=6133009748077041322&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6133009748077041322?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6133009748077041322?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/MKG79PNOj0U/welcome.html" title="News and Update" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/welcome.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;A0UEQ3g6fSp7ImA9Wx9REE8.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-3809680254423931724</id><published>2010-12-11T08:00:00.023+07:00</published><updated>2010-12-11T08:00:02.615+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-12-11T08:00:02.615+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="General" /><title>Tool time: Circle and Arc Tool</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
Circle Tool and Arc Tool&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;p&gt;We previously used the &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to make convex/concave lines to
create profile for the ceiling molding. &lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/5528695f.png"
style="margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em;" align="right"&gt;
However, up till the the end of this Sketchup tutorial, we are not
going to use the &lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c36a627c.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Since this is a rather
fundamental tool, we are going to&amp;nbsp; have a rather thorough
discussion regarding the &lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;/i&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt; at this section.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
There are also two other tools at the 'Drawing toolbar', namely &lt;i&gt;Polygon&lt;img
alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/bf1d1da6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and &lt;i&gt;Freehand&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c05b09bf.png"&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
There is nothing
special about the &lt;i&gt;Polygon tool&lt;/i&gt; since its usage is largely
similar with the &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&amp;nbsp;
&lt;i&gt;Polygon tool&lt;/i&gt;
will create a regular Polygon entities, with 3 or more equal sides.
This tool provides us with option to enter the number of edges to
create and the radius of the polygon. &lt;i&gt;Freehand tool&lt;/i&gt; is
somewhat similar with &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Freehand tool&lt;/i&gt;
is used to draw irregular hand-drawn lines which are comprised of
multiple line segments that are connected together. When the the
starting and ending points of the lines coincide, a face will be
created. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;I have no plan to discuss the &lt;i&gt;Polygon&lt;/i&gt;, and &lt;i&gt;Freehand tools&lt;/i&gt;.
Their usage are rather simple. Besides, I hardly use these tools. In
the contrary, Arc and Circle tools are used quite frequently and some
aspects should be known to optimally use the tools, so I will explain
these two tools in a more detail fashion in this section.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Getting to know Circle and Arc Tool&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;SketchUp can only recognize straight lines and faces (flat surface).
Hardly there is any object that consists of only one straight line. No
wonder, in SketchUp, there is no function or command to thicken or to
color one particular line.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Circles and Arches are basically just a number of straight lines of
the same length stitched together to appear like a circle or an arc.
Each line is called as a segment. The more number of segments created,
the smoother the circle or the arc will appear. However, it will
affect the file size and therefore heavier burden to the computer
processor.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Circle Tool&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Below is the Entity info window when the outline of a circle is
selected (just the outline, not including the face)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/7a2f5c9b.png"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 70%;"
align="right"&gt;Right after the &lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c36a627c.png"&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt;is activated, we are given the opportunity to change the number of
its sides (segments) by typing in the desired number and then press
[Enter]. Initially, the number of segment provided by SketchUp is the
default circle's segments (24), or the last value that we set for the
this tool. The circle radius is determined after we choose its center
point using mouse click and move out the cursor or by typing in a
length value followed by [Enter].&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The strictest work flow of a circle creation is:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Find a plane that will be used as the reference for the new
circle orientation. You can use one the main axes, any existing face,
or create a temporary face for the reference. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Determine a point in the model that will be the center point, or
create a guide(s) using &lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and/or the &lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to obtain a precise location.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click the &lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c36a627c.png"&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt;and, if necessary,
change the number of segments to your liking.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the cursor over the area to be used as the reference (as in
point 'a'). If the circle plane is different than the referenced plane,
press and hold [Shift] key to lock the orientation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click at the point you want as the center point of the circle
(point b) and,&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the cursor away to any direction, then click after the
circle radius seems appropriate or type in any number using the
keyboard then press [Enter] to set the radius precisely. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Step (f) can be made at any time using the entity info window as
shown previously. Step (c) can only be done if the circle has not been
converted into 3-dimensional shape. For the rest of the steps, editing
can be done using the &lt;i&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Note that point (a) must be done correctly from the beginning, since
changing the orientation sometimes is not as simple as creating a new
circle from scratch.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Determining the plane where the circle will be created&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Once we select the &lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c36a627c.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
before clicking the mouse to determine the position of the circle's
center point , we must first determine on what plane the circle will
reside, or which plane will be used as a reference. If we use the
standard &lt;i&gt;ISO&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/View-ISO.png"&gt;view&lt;/i&gt;
and there is no other object that can be used as a reference, then the
circle can only be made on the plane perpendicular to the &lt;span
style="color: blue;"&gt;Blue Axis&lt;/span&gt;. Reference to any other axis can
only be done on the appropriate camera angle as shown in the animation.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Determining reference
for the rotation plane&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
If the new circle will not be placed at any of the existing
geometry (existing faces) we need to find a reference for the rotation
plane of the circle. The same principle applies to the &lt;i&gt;Polygon&lt;img
alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/bf1d1da6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
&lt;i&gt;Rotate&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/9f1975ba.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and &lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Any of existing faces
and one of the main axes can be used as the reference.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Normally, a circle is made on a face of an existing object. So just
need to click at the face and the circle orientation will automatically
follow the referenced face. Otherwise you need to select a particular
face or one of the main axes as a reference and then lock the face
orientation by pressing and holding the [Shift] key and then choose any
position to be the center point of the circle.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Animation below shows, when the standard &lt;i&gt;ISO&lt;img
alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/View-ISO.png"&gt;view&lt;/i&gt;
is selected and no other object can be used as a reference, the
orientation of a new circle can only be set to the blue axis. We can
change the view as shown at the end of the animation, or create a
temporary object that can be used as references. As usual, after we
obtain an orientation reference, we press and hold [Shift] key until
after we click a certain point to set it as the center point of the new
circle.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/General-Circle.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating
various circles with different orientation.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
What about Oval shapes?&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;SketchUp does not provide us with a special tool to create an oval
or ellipse shape. To create an oval shape, we first create a circle,
then
reduce or enlarge one or both of the diameters to get the desired oval
shape.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/18e369d2.png"
style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -0.75em; width: 60%;"
align="right"&gt;To resize a circle diameter, we
use &lt;i&gt;Scale&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
available on the Edit toolbar. Click once on the circle ,then select
the Scale tool so that a yellow bounding box with eight green grips is
displayed around the circle. Click one of the grips in the middle of
one of the bounding box edges (not one of the corner grips), and then
pull the grip out or in until the desired oval shape is achieved. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 2em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Scale Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img
alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png"
style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" align="right"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Scale
tool is used to resize an existing object in the model by dragging one
on the available sliding points. There are two modes of scaling using
the measurement box: By specifying the sizing coefficient (default) or
by determining the final dimensions of the altered aspect. For the
second mode, we must add a value and its notation before pressing enter
(such as 5' 3" for five feet and three inches).&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To obtain an accurate shape/size of the oval, it is better to type
in the desired final value of diameter along with its unit notation
(e.g. 150 cm) using the keyboard and then press [Enter]. Then the
diameter we resize will have the final dimensions of 150 cm. Or, enter
a value (e.g. 0.5) and press [Enter] then the new size of the diameter
will be exactly half of the original.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Arc Tool&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The illustration below shows an arc and a dimension information
along with the Entity info of the arc. .&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/cc883d6a.png"
style="margin-left: 0.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 70%;" align="right"&gt;Radius
information indicates the radius of the circle that forms the arc. As
we know, an arc is a segment of the circumference of a circle.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In contrast to the circle tool, the information on the Entity Info
window of an arc is different with the parameters available during its
creation (as displayed in the measurement box). Bulge is not available
in the entity info window and scaling will not always result as
expected. This indicates that most of the time it is
easier to create a new arc than editing an existing one using the
entity info.
Normally we first prepare two lines that will hold the starting and
ending points of the arc, then determining the curve between the two
lines.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The strictest work flow of an Arc creation is:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Decide which line end(s) to start or to end the new arc.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Activate the &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and, if necessary, change the
number of segments of&amp;nbsp; using the Measurement box. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click on the first point and click on the second point to set the
beginning and the end of the curved line (both ends of &lt;span
style="color: green;"&gt;the green line&lt;/span&gt; at the above picture), or
enter its length using the keyboard and press [Enter]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the mouse cursor towards any position between the two points
and click or input the height of the protrusion (&lt;span
style="color: red;"&gt;the red line&lt;/span&gt; at the above image), or
type in the bulge value through the keyboard and press [Enter].&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Step (b) can be done at any time using the Entity info window as
shown above. As you can see the information on the Entity info window,
one aspect that can be changed directly is the segments (point b). The
other aspect that can also be changed is the radius of the arc (not
included in the Measurement box). However, we usually are concerned
more with how to make a seamless curve to a line/curve or a corner, not
with the exact size of the arc itself.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Creating a perfect connection between an arc with a line or another
arc.
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Connection of an arc to a line or to another arch will look seamless
if&amp;nbsp; the two objects share a common characteristic.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/0ab4bcae.png"
style="border: 1px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 65%;"
align="right"&gt;The &lt;span style="color: cyan;"&gt;Cyan&lt;/span&gt;
and &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;magenta&lt;/span&gt;&lt;b&gt;a&lt;/b&gt; line &lt;b&gt;d&lt;/b&gt;
on the second
picture). The arc connection would be perfect if &lt;b&gt;b&lt;/b&gt; (and &lt;b&gt;c&lt;/b&gt;)
is the radius of each curve and &lt;b&gt;b&lt;/b&gt; perpendicular to the line &lt;b&gt;a&lt;/b&gt;.
For the second image, &lt;b&gt;c&lt;/b&gt; is perpendicular to the line &lt;b&gt;d&lt;/b&gt;.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Colored curves in the picture are arcs with a certain radius. These
curvature form smooth curves that the arc is a continuation of the red
line (or that connects line &lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/7179971e.png"
style="border: 1px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 50%;"
align="left"&gt;Similarly, between two curves /
arches. An arc (the black arc) can connect with another arc (the cyan
act) seamlessly when &lt;b&gt;AC&lt;/b&gt; is a straight line, and &lt;b&gt;AB&lt;/b&gt; and &lt;b&gt;BC&lt;/b&gt;
is the radius of each corresponding curve. The illustration indicates
that &lt;span style="color: cyan; font-weight: bold;"&gt;the cyan arc&lt;/span&gt;
starts at the end point of &lt;b&gt;the black arc&lt;/b&gt; AND the radius of the
cyan arc is in line with the radius of the black arc.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
The connection point between the curve and another object is
referred to as a tangent to the curve. You don't to need to even
remember this, because SketchUp will provide color information when the
connection is perfect with the inference "Tangent at Vertex." &lt;span
style="color: cyan;"&gt;cyan inference&lt;/span&gt; indicates the arch merge
perfectly to a line or to another curve, and &lt;span
style="color: magenta;"&gt;magenta&lt;/span&gt; indicates that arch fits
seamlessly with two lines and/or other arch.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To invoke the &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta inference&lt;/span&gt;,
the starting and ending points of the curve should form an isosceles
triangle with the peak lies between these two points. When isosceles is
achieved, the inference color will turn into &lt;span
style="color: magenta;"&gt;magenta&lt;/span&gt; as seen in the animation below.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;cite&gt;&lt;span style="color: green;"&gt;(Note: Line b, c and AC in the above
illustrations are provided for explanation purpose only. If &lt;b&gt;any&lt;/b&gt;
of these lines does exist, no inference information will appear)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/cite&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Arc_Circle.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating
curves with a smooth continuation from another curve or line(s)&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In another part of this General section, we will learn to create
three-dimensional shapes based on circles and arches, e.i. to create
balls, rings, tires and so forth.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;cite&gt;Keep on Sketching ...&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-3809680254423931724?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/V_3PWg_mqqnFy6nm4h6ssYyRYYc/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/V_3PWg_mqqnFy6nm4h6ssYyRYYc/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/V_3PWg_mqqnFy6nm4h6ssYyRYYc/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/V_3PWg_mqqnFy6nm4h6ssYyRYYc/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/QTTBjR-AtSI" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/3809680254423931724/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=3809680254423931724&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/3809680254423931724?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/3809680254423931724?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/QTTBjR-AtSI/tool-time-circle-and-arc-tool.html" title="Tool time: Circle and Arc Tool" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/12/tool-time-circle-and-arc-tool.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DkcNQHc9eip7ImA9Wx9SFEw.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-6005509375752580747</id><published>2010-12-04T05:00:00.001+07:00</published><updated>2010-12-04T05:08:11.962+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-12-04T05:08:11.962+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Project I" /><title>Adding Roof Element</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a
href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/b85304d9.png"
onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/b85304d9.png','popup','width=578,height=399,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img
alt="Sketchup Tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/b85304d9.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0.5em; width: 45%;"
title="Click for larger image" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;The house has a
simple gable
roof with ceramic roof shingles. Both sides are enclosed with ridge
verges
and the top is
enclosed with ridge shingles, all with the same material with the roof
shingles.
The roof has a 30° slope and is positioned exactly in the center point
of the west
wall. Fascia will be added to cover the bottom end of each roof.
The roof will be extended 60 cm downward to create roof eaves for added
protection to the wall.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In this tutorial, I do not include the roof truss because the detail
of this structure is best left to experts. However, you can draw the
truss when its design has been completed, i.e. to study available space
for roof storage, and superimpose it to the final 3D model. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Steps taken to create the roof are as follow:
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(51, 102, 255); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="color: white; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Previous 3D Model&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapters in this Sketchup
tutorial are
expected to be done in chronological order.
However, if you want to start from this chapter, please download the
last model created from previous lesson(s) at the &lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=3d0325148eee002b4fc904b5c57bb006"
target="_blank"&gt;the 3D warehouse.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Separating walls and floors from the back and front yards before adding
the
roof element&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating basic shape of the roof.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating roof shingles component. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating ridges and ceiling.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adding decorative molding to the ceiling.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Roof finishing.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Separating Walls, Floors and Yard Elements into groups&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;At this tutorial stage there are already quite a lot of objects that
we have
added to the SketchUp 3-D model. In general, these objects can be be
grouped into:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Floors and Walls&lt;br&gt;
Walls and floors including every object attached to them, such as
doors, windows, bathroom and terrace. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Front yard and back yard.&lt;br&gt;
The remaining empty area in the lot that we will fill with outdoor
objects
and vegetation.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To ease further editing the 3D model, we need to isolate these
objects by putting them into separate groups. One by one, we will
select similar objects using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and make them a group.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('MakeGroups');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="MakeGroups" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Selecting object using
Mouse
Click&lt;/span&gt;s&lt;br&gt;
We can use mouse click to select object(s).&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Single click to focus editing on an object.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double click to select a face and its edges.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Triple click to select all connected&amp;nbsp; faces and
edges to the clicked object.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
To change our selections:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul style="margin-left: 30px; padding-left: 0px;"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;img alt="Teras"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/1080c230.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -0.5em; width: 28px;"
align="right"&gt;Holding [Control] key to add another object
to the selection, &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;img alt="Teras"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/18b73476.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -0.5em; width: 28px;"
align="right"&gt;Holding [Shift] key to&amp;nbsp; add OR remove
an object from the selection.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;img alt="Teras"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/d409e52f.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -0.5em; width: 28px;"
align="right"&gt;Holding [Shift+Control] keys to remove an
object from selections&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Move the camera so the whole model can be clearly seen from the west.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and press/hold
[Control] until the cursor appear like &lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/1080c230.png"&gt;.
Double Click at the front
yard,&amp;nbsp;
and then double&amp;nbsp; click at the back yard to include it to the
selection.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Put the selected objects into a group using&amp;nbsp; Context menu
-&amp;gt; Make Group. Reactivate the context menu to rename
the group as "Yards" using Entity Info window. Close the window to
finish.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select all objects using windows &lt;i&gt;Select All&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
short-cut (Ctrl+A).
Then select again&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and press/hold &lt;i&gt;[Shift+Control]&amp;nbsp;&lt;/i&gt;
until the cursor turns into &lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/d409e52f.png"&gt;.
Click once at the Yards group to exclude it from current selection. I
don't particularly user mouse clicks to select objects one by one since
there are already a number of object in the model(doors, windows,
terraces, bathroom components)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Redo as in step (c) to make the selected objects a group. Name
this group as "Floor 1".&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('MakeGroups');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Terasa"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Grouping.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
Animation for Creating wall and floor group.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana,Sans-Serif;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Creating the roof basic shape&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;div&gt;
We want the roof to have a 30° slope, with its axis
positioned right at the middle of the western wall. For that, we will
create a prism based on an isosceles
triangle as the basic form of the roof. With available dimensions and
slope specification we can find the roof
high using trigonometric formula. But that's not SketchUp, in this
tutorial we will only use &lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
&lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to help us create
triangle.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('StrukturAwal');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="StrukturAwal" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Protractor Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png"
style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" align="right"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
SketchUp provide us with a Protractor tool to create a guide line at a
specified inclination to a certain line/object. &lt;br&gt;
Set
the origin point of the slope, and specify another point to specify the
base line. Then, set the size of the slope using the mouse and the
Measurement Tool. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/3128d231.png"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0.3em; margin-top: 1em; width: 50%;"
align="right"&gt;The
cursor will change as illustrated. The cursor color will be &lt;b&gt;black&lt;/b&gt;
when its rotation plane is not the parallel with one of the three axes.
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Make sure we are not inside any of the groups by clicking anywhere
outside the existing groups.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add a guide to create an isosceles triangle&amp;nbsp; with a slope
30° and&amp;nbsp; with roof peak positioned at the middle of the western
wall: &lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the right edge of the western wall to find the top center
position of the wall. Move the mouse toward the middle of the wall and
press Click when the &lt;i&gt;Midpoint&lt;/i&gt;
inference appears indicating the exact middle point of the wall edge.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and move the mouse some
where on
and above the west floor until the protractor color turns Red. Press
Shift to
lock this position and click at the upper right corner of the wall to
initiate the slope.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click
somewhere on the upper end of the wall to make it&amp;nbsp; the base line
and rotate the protractor upward and type in [30] to set the slope at
30°.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;To create an isosceles triangle, just use the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to create a line starting from the right most point of the west wall
edge, to the intersecting point of the guides, and to the left most
point of the wall edge, and go back to the starting point so an
isosceles triangle will be created.
When the three lines has completely created an enclosed space, SketchUp
will automatically create a face. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and push the newly created triangle away until it reaches the east
wall, forming an isosceles prism. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Remove the guides using &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('StrukturAwal');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Terasa"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/BlokAtap.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
animation to create the roof basic shape.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Creating detail shape for roof shingles&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Creating Roof Tile Component. &lt;/h5&gt;
Although technically, we can easily make each shingle as a
component with the shape and size similar to a real shingle. This can
make a lot of burden to the computer processor. Therefore in this
tutorial we will only make the overall shape of the roof shingles and
later we will add a pattern that will cover this shape.&lt;br&gt;
The roof shingles of the house is comprised two identical parts,
front and rear. At this stage we will prepare only the detail shape of
the
roof tile parts and we will add tile patterns in the next chapter of
this tutorial. We will add ridge verges on the left/right side of the
roof and fascia to cover the bottom edge of the roof shingles. We will
the
same material patterns for the all the shingles verges, and therefore
we
need to make this part of the roof a group or component&amp;nbsp; (More
about this in&amp;nbsp; "Finishing"). Since the front roof is shaped
exactly the same with the rear, we will make it as a component so that
it can be reusable for the rear side.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;Component&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
If a rather intricate object is going to be used for more than once in
a model, it is better to define it as a component since edits to a
component will be reflected in every instance of the component in the
model, thus more efficient modeling. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
The roof shingles shape will be based on the the front face of the
roof basic structure. Create a new box by pulling the face 10 cm high
(the
thickness of the entire structure of the roof and battens) using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Make the box a component and change its the axis consistent with the
roof slope. We also need to lengthen the lower part of the component by
60
cm to create roof eaves to cover the upper part of the front and rear
wall. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt; &lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('KomponenGenteng');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="KomponenGenteng" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Selecting object(s)
using the context menu&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
In addition to mouse clicks, object selection can also be done using
the Context Menu -&amp;gt; Select with these options:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Bounding Edges&lt;/b&gt;. To select only the
surrounding edges of an active face&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;Connected Faces&lt;/b&gt;. To select&amp;nbsp;
only faces that have edge(s) touching directly with an active face.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;b&gt;All Connected.&lt;/b&gt; To select&amp;nbsp; all
faces and edges that directly connected to an active&amp;nbsp; face.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Select &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt;and press [Control] once to create a new face. Click at the
front face of the roof basic shape and pull it upward 10 cm &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select all the connected faces to the newly add face:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and&amp;nbsp; right click
at the face of the roof structure to activate the Context menu.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select
all the thickness of the object using Context
Menu -&amp;gt; Select -&amp;gt; Connected Faces. This command will select all
face connected to the initial face we select. The underneath face will
not be selected. We will fix this later.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;With the objects selection as in point (c), reactivate again
the&amp;nbsp;
context menu and display the "Create Component" window. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Rename the component to "Roof Shingles"&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Press Set Component Axis button to reorient the axes
consistent with the roof slope. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click at the bottom corner of the roof shingles to
set it
as the axes crossing point&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click on the bottom line which is parallel to the
main red axis to establish the direction of the component red axis
(This is just to confirm that the component red axis remains parallel
to the main red axis).&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click on the bottom sloping line to set is as the
component blue axis .&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;When the "Create Component" window reappear, check at
the "Replace selection with component" so that the original group will
be completely replaced with the component that we create. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click the Create button to finish the component.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add the lower part of the roof shingles&amp;nbsp; by 60 cm for
roof
eaves so the top of the wall will be protected from rain and sun.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('KomponenGenteng');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/GentengDepan.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
animation for the front section of the roof shingles.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Rear roof shingles and finalizing the roof element&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
The rear part of the roof is exactly the same with the front.
So, we only need to copy the front component and fix its orientation it
by rotating the component copy by 180° using the &lt;i&gt;Rotate&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/9f1975ba.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Later we will fascia
at the front side of the roof shingles with a thickness of 2 cm and a
height of 25 cm using of &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt; &lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('GentengBelakang');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="GentengBelakang" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Rotate Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/9f1975ba.png"
style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -1em;"
align="right"&gt;We also can use &lt;i&gt;Move /Copy
tool&lt;/i&gt; to rotate an object at its designated rotating point(s). To
rotate an object at any other point, we use the &lt;i&gt;Rotate&lt;/i&gt; &lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
&lt;br&gt;
To use the rotate tool, first we need to specify its rotation plane,
then select the rotation point and specify the rotation angle. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/b194c816.png"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 50%;"
align="right"&gt;The
Cursor shape will appear as illustrated . The cursor color is black if
the rotation plane is not parallel with any of the three main
axes.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Copy the roof tile component using&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and [Control] key and
put it somewhere on the back.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Rotate the new copy of the&amp;nbsp; component so it will be a
mirror image to the front roof using &lt;i&gt;Rotate&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/9f1975ba.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Rotate&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/9f1975ba.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and focus the mouse to
the
horizontal
plane until the cursor turn &lt;span style="color: blue;"&gt;blue&lt;/span&gt; and
press [Shift] to lock the
orientation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move
the mouse over the topmost line of the component copy and click at any
point along that line and release the Shift key&amp;nbsp; to set the point
as the center of the rotation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the the mouse again along that same line and and
click to set the line to rotate.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Make a right rotation using the&amp;nbsp; mouse and type in
[180] to make a half circle rotation.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the new roof tile component so it will touch perfectly
at the top with the original copy of the component using &lt;i&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Fixing the lower side of the roof shingles component.&lt;br&gt;
When creating the roof shingles component (1c), we only selected the
upper
faces of the roof tile block, so at the moment the bottom face is
still missing.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double click at the roof shingles component to enter edit
mode
of the component.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
create a new line along the bottom edge of the component and a face
will be created covering the bottom part of the component.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Add fascia to cover the bottom side of the roof tile set.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
and press Control key to add a new face and pull the face forward by 2
cm.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Still using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
click at the bottom face the newly created&amp;nbsp; square and pull it
down
to crate fascia with&amp;nbsp; 2
cm thick and and&amp;nbsp; 25 cm high along the tile lines.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exit the component edit mode using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and by clicking
anywhere outside the component.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Notice that, the front side roof component also will be automatically
fixed and added the fascia.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('GentengBelakang');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/GentengBelakang.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
animation for rear roof shingles.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Adding Ridge Shingles&lt;/h5&gt;
Ridge shingles are added to the top edges between the two
sections of the roof. The ridge is shaped as a half circle bulge
positioned along the top edges as illustrated below. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/b16ffb26.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 35%;"
align="right"&gt;To create the ridge shingle
shape, we will also us the &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to form a semicircular curved
line connecting the two peaks of each roof section.
Then add two lines using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
along the top edge of
each roof section to create a face.
The face is then pressed down along the width of the roof sections
using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to create the ridge shingle shape. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt; &lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('Nok');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="Nok" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Ensure we are not inside a group/component by clicking
somewhere&amp;nbsp; outside any of the group components using&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the camera view on to somewhere near the west side of
the joining point the roof sections.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Arc Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="ToolLine"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"
style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -1em;"
align="right"&gt;We
will use Arc tool to create a curved line. Soon after we select the Arc
tool, we can enter the number of segments that the arc will consist of.
More segments mean smoother arc, but will effect the file size and the
processor load.
After the arch is created, we can simply type in the height of the arch
so that the final shape of the arc can be controlled accurately.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Select &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click on the upper end of the rear roof section and then click
again on the upper end of front roof section. Slide the mouse upward
and click when the "Half Circle" inference appears to create a
semicircular arch. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the starting point of the newly created arch, click again
at bottom point of the roof section intersection, and click again on
the other end of the arch to close the edges and to create a face.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double
Click at the newly created face to select the face and turn in into a
group using the context menu. Activate Entity Info window and rename
the group as "Ridge".&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double click the new group to enter edit mode. Select the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click on the surface and push the face eastward and immediately
type in [700] to completely fill the gap between the two roof sections.
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exit the group editing by clicking anywhere outside the group
using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('Nok');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/NokdanGroupGenteng.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
Animation to add Ridge Shingles&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Creating Gable Ends and Ceiling &lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Gable ends are the wall structures above the gable walls that
support a gable roof. At this point this area is mostly blocked by the
roof shingles components. Therefore we need to temporarily hide the
roof
tile
group using Context Menu -&amp;gt; Hide.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1.5em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Hide&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
We
can hide one or a few objects temporarily in order not to obstruct view
to objects located behind the object(s). To hide object(s) we use
Context Menu or menu
View -&amp;gt; hide. Use menu Edit -&amp;gt; Unhide to unhide the objects. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The gable end outer shape is exactly the same with the east/west
side of the roof basic shape. We just need to add thickness similar to
wall thickness using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and remove any excess line using the &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
We will rename this group as "Gable Ends".
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('Sopisopi');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="Sopisopi" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Hide Group shingles so as not to block the editing of gable ends
which is located behind it.
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click the&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and right click at the
Roof group and activate Context Menu, &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select "Hide" to hide the roof. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Triple click on one of the basic roof shape faces to select all
the structure and make this initial structure a group. Rename the group
as "Gable Ends" through Entity Info window. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create gable ends by thickening both sides of the roof basic
structure similar to wall thickness.
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Enter the Gable End group and thicken each side of the gable
end by 15 15 cm using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Erase all excess lines between the two gable end using the &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img
alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exit the "Gable End" group by clicking anywhere outside the
group using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Using the &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
create shapes of the ceiling right on top of the walls. Each
ceiling&amp;nbsp; has the same shape with the enclosed space between the
walls.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Make the living room ceiling by creating two adjacent
rectangles to fill the space between all the living room walls and
delete any excess line so there will be only one face to represent the
ceiling. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Back Face and Reverse
Face&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Default
color of any SketchUp object differentiate between the front face color
and the back face color. Back face color is slightly darker than the
front face. It is important that objects faces are not reversed,
especially when we want to apply material to the objects. To reverse a
face, use Context Menu -&amp;gt; Reverse Back Face.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Add a rectangle to each of other rooms exactly the same shape with the
inner space of the room walls. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;At this point, we see the ceiling from above, and it would
normally have somewhat darker color because what we see is their back
face. If any of the ceiling has somewhat lighter color, we need to
reverse the face using Context Menu -&amp;gt; Reverse Face.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Unhide all hidden objects using menu
Edit
-&amp;gt; Unhide -&amp;gt; All. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('Sopisopi');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/SopisopiPlafon.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
Animation to Create Gable Ends and Ceiling&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Adding Molding to the Ceilings&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;All room ceilings have decorative molding around their edges.
This moulding is usually made of woods or gypsum casts. For modeling
simplicity, I do not add thickness to the ceiling and position the
ceiling
right at the top of each wall, which may not be appropriate in real
situation.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/En/Detil-Molding.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em; width: 40%;"
title="Click for larger image" align="left"&gt;The
detail shape and size of decorative molding is illustrated in the
picture. The flat sections on top and right side are the part that will
be attached to walls and ceilings.
To create the profile, we need to divide the hypotenuse into five equal
segments. The first two segments for the bulge and the next two
segments for the depressed part. Both are 1 cm away from the original
line.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To create this profile, we just need to make a right triangle
of&amp;nbsp; 8x5 cm using the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt;and
decorate its&amp;nbsp;
hypotenuse with a convex and concave lines. To divide the hypotenuse
into 5 segments, we just use the Divide function available in
the context menu, and using the &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
we add a convex line and a concave line each covering two fifth
of&amp;nbsp; the hypotenuse.&amp;nbsp; When the 2- dimensional profile is made,
we will
use &lt;i&gt;Follow Me&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c95c472a.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to create this profile
along all the ceiling edges.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('LisPlafon');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 19px; width: 300px;"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="LisPlafon" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Focus the view on to the east part rear corner of the bathroom
ceiling. If necessary, hide any object that may block your view block
using Context Menu -&amp;gt; Hide. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create a right triangle with a height of 8 cm and width of 5 cm
using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt; at a temporary
location in such a way that the lower end of the triangle is positioned
right at
one ceiling corners.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Divide the sloping line into 5 segments&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select
the sloping line using the &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and activate Context
menu and select
Divide. Several dots will appear along the active line indicating the
number of segments it will create when the mouse is clicked.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the mouse along the sloping line and click when
the segments indicates&amp;nbsp;5. There will be five equally spaced&amp;nbsp;
intersection points along the line as if the line is comprised of 5
continuing separate lines.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add a concave line to first two segments.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click
to bottom point of the sloping edge and&amp;nbsp; make another click at the
end of second segment to measure the arc as 2/5 part of the hypotenuse.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move
the mouse to the right so a bulge is created and type in [1] to create
a concave with 1 cm height. As usual, a face is automatically created
when the area is completely enclosed.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add a convex line to next two segments
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click
the mouse at the top point of the concave and move the mouse upward
until it cover another 2/5 of the slope and press click at the segment
point.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the mouse to the right so a dent is created and type in
[1] to create a convex with 1 cm deep.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Remove unnecessary lines so the final shape of the object is
similar to the above illustration.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Prepare
the new object to be pasted at the appropriate positions by Double
clicking the face to select the whole shape, and cut it using Edit
-&amp;gt; Cut or Control-X (a standard window short cut for Cutting) to
store this object into computer memory.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Paste the profile shape contained on the computer memory to a
corner
of the bathroom ceiling.
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
and move the mouse to the left most corner of the bathroom ceiling and
press Control-v to place the profile shape at this corner.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Still using &lt;i&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
position the profile to its proper location by clicking the top left
corner of the profile and move it so it be attached to the upper left
corner of the ceiling.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Paste this object to a corner of any other ceiling .&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Focus your mouse to the corner of the living room ceiling and
press Control-V at the point of this angle, nudge the mouse a little so
that the profile shape appear at this position and press click to put
the profile on this face.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Repeat this procedures to the rest of the room ceilings. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Follow Me Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;img alt="ToolLine"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c95c472a.png"
style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: -1em;"
align="right"&gt;We can change a two- dimensional face
into a 3-D object using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/i&gt;
tool by pushing/pulling the face along a perpendicular path to the
face. To change a two-dimensional face into 3-D following path other
than perpendicular, we use Follow Me tool. First, preselect the path,
and then select &lt;i&gt;Follow Me&lt;/i&gt; tool and click at the face.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Create moulding for the living room ceiling.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Focus the camera so that the corner where the profile is
attached can be clearly viewed. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click at the living room ceiling and&amp;nbsp; activate Context
menu then choose&amp;nbsp; 'Select Boundary' to select all the edges of the
ceiling.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Follow Me&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c95c472a.png"&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the profile
face that is attached to&amp;nbsp; this ceiling. Automatically a profile
will sculptured around the bounding edges.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Repeat the above processes to other areas of the ceilings to
complete all the ceiling molding. (The tutorial animation does not
include these steps)&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exit the &lt;i&gt;Gable group&lt;/i&gt; to finish.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('LisPlafon');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="ButtonX"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;"
align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/LisPlafon.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
animation to create molding for the
living room ceiling&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Finalizing the roof &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Although from the outside, the roof
already seems finished, there is still a small part missing, the rear
wall of
the living room still has not reached the roof so that there is a big
opening
above the wall that needs to be filled. Add two wall sections to the
opening so
that all the walls will touch the roof. The wall addition is done
within the “Garble”
group so that the top of all the walls will still be flat. (We need
to keep the upper side of the walls flat to prepare for the second
floor addition).&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To do this section, I will only show
you the animation of the process for adding these walls. Notice the
tools I used,
since you have to to do this by yourself. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/FinalisasiAtap.gif"
style="width: 100%;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Tutorial
animation for finalizing the roof
shingles element &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
We have Accomplished ....&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table id="customers"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;th style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;No&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;th style="width: 445px;"&gt;Tutorial Topics&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Performing three different ways of
selecting object using mouse
click(s)
.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Applying standard window shortcuts to
do: Select All (Ctrl-A), Cut (Ctrl-X) and Paste
(Ctrl-V)&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;3&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating &lt;i&gt;Guides&lt;/i&gt; with a
specified slope using &lt;i&gt;Protractor Tool&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Adding, changing component axes,
copying and editing a simple component.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;5&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Selecting object(s) using context menu:
&lt;i&gt;Connected Faces&lt;/i&gt; and &lt;i&gt;Bounding Edges&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;6&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using &lt;i&gt;Rotate Tool&lt;/i&gt; to spin an
object on a preselected plane. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; vertical-align: top;"&gt;7&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Dividing a line into several
equal length lines using context menu &lt;i&gt;Divide&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;8&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using &lt;i&gt;Arc tool&lt;/i&gt; to create a
concave or&amp;nbsp; convex line. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;9&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Temporarily hiding an object using
Context Menu-Hide and bring it again
back using Menu -&amp;gt;&amp;nbsp;Unhide. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; vertical-align: middle;"&gt;10&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Using &lt;i&gt;Follow Me tool&lt;/i&gt;
to draw
profile along the edges of a face to create moulding around the face.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; vertical-align: middle;"&gt;11&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Reversing a face using Context
Menu -&amp;gt; Reverse Face&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/aad9ad85.jpg"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 45%;"
align="right"&gt;We are almost done with the
Project I. We only need to add details to the front and the backyard
and apply appropriate materials such as ceramic shingles, and wood
patterns so the 3-D model will look a lot more realistic.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Cheers&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-6005509375752580747?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/X7SxuKfFVUHLe-wITY1Amim9d-c/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/X7SxuKfFVUHLe-wITY1Amim9d-c/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/X7SxuKfFVUHLe-wITY1Amim9d-c/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/X7SxuKfFVUHLe-wITY1Amim9d-c/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/aMFCLr1-ozE" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/6005509375752580747/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=6005509375752580747&amp;isPopup=true" title="1 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6005509375752580747?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6005509375752580747?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/aMFCLr1-ozE/adding-roof-element.html" title="Adding Roof Element" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_StepDetil.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>1</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/12/adding-roof-element.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;C0AFQ3k-eyp7ImA9Wx9TFUo.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-1063352479417415536</id><published>2010-11-21T12:34:00.005+07:00</published><updated>2010-11-24T11:08:32.753+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-11-24T11:08:32.753+07:00</app:edited><title>Adding Interior and Exterior Details</title><content type="html">&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Prior to adding a roof, we will add a few details to the model we
have created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #3366ff; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="color: white; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Previous 3D Model&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapters in a project are
expected to be done in chronological order.
However, if you want to start from this chapter, please download the
last model created from previous lesson(s) from &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=56239ee4827fedaafe051747743da215" target="_blank"&gt;the 3D warehouse.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Adding details to the bathroom. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adding front terrace&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adding details to the front bedroom windows.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating rear terrace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;

Detailing the Bathroom&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/ProjectOne-Bathroom_Dim.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/ProjectOne-Bathroom_Dim.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img align="left" alt="BathDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/ProjectOne-Bathroom_Dim.png" style="border: 0px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em; width: 50%;" title="Click for larger image" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tutorial, there are only two objects reside in the bathroom: a
toilet and a shower
corner. Both are downloadable from Google 3D Warehouse. (See: &lt;a href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/bathroom-components.html" target="_blank"&gt;Freebies: Bathroom Components&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;br /&gt;
As usual, in order to prevent water from spilling out, the bathroom
floor is always lower than outside floor. At the shower corner area,
the floor is also lower than the rest of the floor, so the bathroom
will be relatively dry.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Changing the field of view&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.5em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Field of View (FoV)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By default, SketchUp will provide you with a 35° perspective. This is
assumed to be the "normal" perspective of human eyes. The number can be
set
between 1° and 120°. The main reason we have a larger FoV is that we
can set our view closer to objects while keeping more object(s) in our
view. Therefore, the camera can be moved more freely in a small space.
However, the farther the camera from the object(s), the more distorted
they appear.&lt;br /&gt;
FoV can be modified from menu &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Camera&lt;/span&gt;&lt;i&gt;
-&amp;gt; Field of
View&lt;/i&gt;. Type in the desired number using your keyboard and press
enter. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Editing in a very small space, just like this bathroom, is not
easy because most of the time our view will be blocked by walls.
One way to overcome this is to widen our view by increasing the &lt;i&gt;field
of view&lt;/i&gt;.
The effect is similar with viewing through a wide lens camera. From
the same distance, area included in our view will be wider.
However, just like in photography, the wider the lenses, the more
distorted the object will appear. &lt;br /&gt;
Change the &lt;i&gt;Field of View&lt;/i&gt; (FoV) to 60° and set your view so the
whole bathroom floor and the bathroom door can be seen clearly.&amp;nbsp;
Later in&amp;nbsp; this tutorial, we will revert our view back to 'normal'.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Lowering the bathroom Floor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;div&gt;
The bathroom floor is 3 cm lower than the living room floor.
In
order to do that, we need to isolate the bathroom floor from the rest
of the floor by adding a line along the inner side of the door using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Afterward, we will push the
floor by 3 cm using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA1');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 19px; width: 300px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="umpetanFormA1" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Isolating face using
Line
Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ToolLine" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Previously we remove line(s) separating faces so the faces will merge
into only one face (aka: &lt;i&gt;healing&lt;/i&gt;).
And vice versa, to separate an area from a face we need to add one or
more lines so the area will be isolated from the rest of the face. &lt;br /&gt;
To ensure isolation, we need to use point and line inference provided
by SketchUp. Sometime, it is desirable to make a line longer than
necessary to ensure intersection. Later, we will remove the redundant
line(s) when isolation has occurred. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Select &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and create a line on the floor of the bathroom just below the inner
side of the door. To ensure that the line will actually cut the floor,
draw the line from one corner of the bathroom to the other corner. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;When the line is completed, SketchUp will
automatically “heal” the door opening so it is now no longer open. Just
select the redundant face at the door opening using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="ToolSelect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and press [Del] to cancel the
healing in the area. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and push the bathroom floor down. Without clicking any mouse key, type
in [3] using the keyboard and press [Enter]. This will lower the face
exactly by 3 cm. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA1');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ButtonX" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Terasa" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/BathroomA2.gif" style="width: 100%;" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Animated
Tutorial - Lowering
the bathroom floor.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Detailing the bathroom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
The shower corner floor is 6 cm below the bathroom floor, with
an
area measuring 80x80 cm. The shape of the floor is not completely a
square. We will first create a rectangle measuring 80x80 cm using the &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Then, using the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
we will add a sloping line to
finalize the shape. When the shape is completed, we will push the face
by 6 cm using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA2');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 19px; width: 300px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="umpetanFormA2" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;List Separator in
Measurement Box&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Some tools require more than one entry in the measurement box. Entries
are separated by a List Separator.&lt;br /&gt;
List separator symbol used in the Measurement Box is determined by your
operating system setting. In this SketchUp tutorial, we will use &lt;b&gt;a
coma&lt;/b&gt;
[,] as the &lt;i&gt;List Separator&lt;/i&gt;. Check your Windows Control Panel to
find
the right symbol. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Select the &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the
intersection between the floor, the east and north walls.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move your mouse so a rectangle is formed on the floor.
Then, release the mouse button and type in [80,80] using the
keyboard and press [Enter].&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="ToolSelect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the bottom line
of the east wall to create a guide line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the mouse inward and without clicking the mouse.
Then, type in
[67] and press [Enter] to create a guide line 67 cm away from the wall.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the intersection
of the guide line and the bathroom corner area. Move the mouse to the
other side of the corner to make a small triangle at the corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;When the line turns magenta, click at the opposite line.
This
will create a equilateral triangle so the opposite side will also has
67
cm length.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Erase the rest of the small triangle and the guide line
using &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to finish the wall corner shape.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click and push the shower
corner floor area. Then, without clicking the mouse, type [6] and press
[Enter]
to lower the
floor by 6 cm.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA2');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ButtonX" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Placing the toilet and the shower corner set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
If you have not downloaded the toilet and table components,
please open &lt;a href="http://sketchuptutor.blogspot.com/2009/12/freebies-bathroom.html" target="_blank"&gt;Freebies: Bathroom Components&lt;/a&gt; for links and saving
folder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 2em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;Zoom-in and Zoom out&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;img align="right" alt="ScrollWheel" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/2ad7e30a.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 45px;" /&gt;If points/intersections are too small
to select, you can &lt;i&gt;Zoom-in &lt;/i&gt;/ &lt;i&gt;Zoom-out&lt;/i&gt; your view
using the mouse Scroll Wheel. The zooming will not affect currently
active tool/objects.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
The toilet component must be positioned so its back will rest at
the middle of the remaining wall next to the bathroom door. Place the
component toilet somewhere in the middle of the bathroom floor and
rotate it so it will have the appropriate orientation. Then, move
the toilet using the designated wall as the reference.&lt;br /&gt;
The shower
corner set will also need reorientation. Place the component in the
middle of the bathroom floor. Rotate the component so the shower
head/tap will be placed on the bathroom south wall. Then move the
component so the curtain rod will be attached to each wall. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA3');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 19px; width: 300px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="umpetanFormA3" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adding the bathroom toilet&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Using the &lt;i&gt;Components&lt;/i&gt; browser, select the Toto
toilet from the Components folder and place it in the middle of the
bathroom floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Point your mouse to top of the toilet component until the
four red plus signs appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click at the plus sign on the right of the
component and rotate it clockwise. Without clicking any mouse button,
type [90] using the keyboard and press [Enter] to finish rotating the
toilet to its proper orientation. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Find an approximate middle point of the back of the
toilet
component and click to use it as the grab point.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move your mouse in the green axis direction until the
green
inference&amp;nbsp; appears. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Press [Shift] to lock the inference and find the middle
point
of the back wall. Click at at the wall when the blue dot [midpoint]
inference appear.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click again the approximate middle point of the back of
the
toilet component to use as the grab point.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the mouse in the red axis direction until the red
inference appears.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Press [Shift] to lock the inference and move your cursor
until it touches the face of the back wall. Click at the wall when the
“on face” inference appears to place the component at its designated
position&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;find the middle point of the back wall. Click at at the
wall
when the blue dot [midpoint] inference appear&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Placing a shower corner. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Open again the Components browser and select the Shower
Corner Set component.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Place the shower cornet set in the middle of the bathroom
floor.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Rotate the component so the shower head will reside at
the north wall. Use the measurement box to rotate accurately.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Use the end of each curtain rods as the grab points
when&amp;nbsp; moving the component&amp;nbsp; so it will be attached on the
designated walls. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormA3');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ButtonX" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="BathInside" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/En/BathroomDetail.gif" style="width: 100%;" /&gt;&lt;span class="Apple-style-span" style="border-collapse: separate; color: black; font-family: 'Times New Roman'; font-size: medium; font-style: normal; font-variant: normal; font-weight: normal; letter-spacing: normal; line-height: normal; orphans: 2; text-indent: 0px; text-transform: none; white-space: normal; widows: 2; word-spacing: 0px;"&gt;&lt;span class="Apple-style-span" style="color: #666666; font-family: Arial; font-size: 10px; white-space: pre;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Animated
Tutorial - Detailing the bathroom &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Restore Field of View setting back to 35°.&lt;/h5&gt;
Restore the FoV to 35 using similar steps as detailed in (1) so
the view is back to the&amp;nbsp; "normal" perspective. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;

Adding the Front Terrace&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;img align="right" alt="Teras" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/bab18b8c.jpg" style="border: 1px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 40%;" /&gt;The front terrace is designed to look as
illustrated in the image. The terrace consists of three main objects: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The floor, including a small step on the west side to enter the
terrace &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The roof terrace made of concrete cast. The roof width is the
same with the width of the front/door window. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Two terrace posts with connecting overhead beam to appear like a
gate.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
Detail dimensions of each objects will be provided during each
object creation.&lt;br /&gt;
For
easy editing/modification, all the three main objects will be made into
one group so editing this object will not effect any of the surrounding
objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Preparing a initial shape for the terrace.&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;div&gt;
&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/TerasBox02.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/TerasBox02.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="BathDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/TerasBox02.png" style="border: 0px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0.25em; width: 40%;" title="Click for larger image" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
We
are going to use floor and roof terrace as the initial
reference. To ease placements and sizing of objects, we will prepare
a box (colored in blue in the adjacent image) with the following
measurement: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Length&lt;/i&gt; is similar to the floor length of 120 cm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Width&lt;/i&gt; is exactly the same with front door and window
widths which is 171 cm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Height&lt;/i&gt; is based on the lower part of the&amp;nbsp; roof
cast which is 275 cm above Point zero.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
We are going to use &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Rectangle&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt; and &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/i&gt;&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
However,&amp;nbsp; we want to apply Grouping technique so new object(s)
will be isolated from existing walls, windows, etc, therefore, editing
will be done without fear of unintentional modification to these
existing
objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormB1');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 19px; width: 300px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="umpetanFormB1" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Editing objects within
a Group&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ToolLine" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To edit objects contained in a group, simply double click the group
using &lt;i&gt;Select tool&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
By default, where we are in a group, all surrounding objects will be
dimmed.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Move the camera/view so that both the front door and the front window
can be seen clearly. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the line separating the ground and the front wall just
under the window. Drag the mouse to create a
rectangle and immediately type in [171,
120], then press Enter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double click at the the newly created rectangle using&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;/i&gt;&lt;img alt="ToolSelect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and activate &lt;i&gt;context
menu&lt;/i&gt;, then select &lt;i&gt;Make Group&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double
click the newly created group to enter the group. Raise the&amp;nbsp;
rectangle using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
by 275 cm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exit the group and&amp;nbsp; move the right side of the group to
make it parallel with the left side of the front door jamb.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Name the group as 'Terrace' using&amp;nbsp; Context Menu -&amp;gt;
Entity Info&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormB1');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ButtonX" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Terasa" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/TerasA.gif" style="width: 100%;" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Animated
Tutorial - Creating
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;initial
"block"&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt; for
the front terrace&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Creating Floors, Roof and Column Elements&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;div&gt;
&lt;div&gt;
&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Teras03.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Teras03.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img align="left" alt="TerasDim" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Teras03.png" style="border: 0px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em; width: 40%;" title="Click for larger image" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Measurement
details of each terrace elements are shown in the illustration. We are
going to make the elements within the group we created earlier. &lt;br /&gt;
Notice that, of the three terrace elements, the column element touches
both the floor and the ceiling. Therefore, we are going to make the
columns also as a group so each elements can easily be edited without
disturbing any other element. &lt;br /&gt;
We would first make the front face of the box a group. Then create the
terrace roof and floor and finish the column elements of the terrace. &lt;br /&gt;
For the purpose of the animation efficiency, we will start editing the
columns though the roof and the floor are not completely done.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormB2');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img alt="StepDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 19px; width: 300px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div id="umpetanFormB2" style="display: none;"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the camera as we did in step (1a).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Double click at the group and make the front rectangle a
group by itself. This group is designated to hold the terrace columns.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Erase the two vertical lines on the back using the &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;
so the bottom face is now
disconnected with the top face. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;,
pull the top face by 15 cm, then
pull the front of the newly created box by 50 cm to finish the terrace
roof.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Finishing the
right side of the terrace floor&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Raise the floor until it is at the save level with the
interior floor, then push it by 3 cm to set the level to its final
position. Or just type in [47] immediately after raising the face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Extend the left side of the floor by 12,5 cm to the left
using the&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
to finish the left part of
the floor..&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add a stair step of 30 cm long and 10 cm below the terrace
floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Push/Pull &amp;amp; Control
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ToolLine" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/PullPlus.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Push/Pull tool can be used to move a face so the object will be bigger
or smaller. If&amp;nbsp; Control key is pressed while the Push/Pull is
active, then the selected face will stay and a new face, and its
surrounding wall(s), is created parallel to the starting face. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Still using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
move the camera to the left side
of the terrace floor. We need to add a floor step by extending the
floor.
Prior to pulling, press Control key so the cursor will change into &lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/PullPlus.png" /&gt;.
This will&amp;nbsp; maintain the original
face.
Select the left face and pull by 30 cm. Now we have a new box adjacent
to the existing floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Push the newly created box by 10 cm using&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to finish the stair step.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Finishing the right side of the floor terrace.
&lt;div&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Line tool to recreate
missing face(s) &lt;/span&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ToolLine" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" /&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Sometimes, when we are manipulating an object, SketchUp can
inadvertently delete one of its faces. &lt;br /&gt;
To get the face back, just use the Line tool to redraw a line over one
of the existing sides of the missing face. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Remove the unneeded vertical face by deleting the vertical lines using
the &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Erase&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
&lt;br /&gt;
As shown int the animation, this may lead to erasing both of the right
side of the roof and the floor. Use &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
and create a line over one of the sides to reclaim the missing
faces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Add the floor width by 12,5 cm to the left using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to finish the floor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;For the sake of the animation&lt;/span&gt;&lt;i&gt;
flow, this step is 'postponed' until we have finished working with the
left column (point h)&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating the left and top side of the column element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Exiting a Group&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Use Select tool and click any area outside the group to exit the group.&lt;br /&gt;
To exit a group you will need to click a few times if the group is
within other groups (nested group)&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Using &lt;i&gt;Select&lt;img alt="ToolSelect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
double click at the front terrace group
to&amp;nbsp; go inside the group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Thicken the front side by 20 cm using &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
and
also the left side by 25 cm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Heighten the top side by 75 cm so now the total height is
350 cm.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Finishing the terrace columns&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Get inside the column group. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Thicken the right side of the column block by 25 cm using
the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select&amp;nbsp; &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Guide&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to draw a &lt;i&gt;Construction
line&lt;/i&gt; at 40 cm
away parallel from the top. Click at the top side and move the cursor
downward the type in [40].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
and click at the
intersection point between the column group and the top left of the
terrace roof. Move the mouse downward parallel to the blue axis. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;When the line turns &lt;span style="color: blue;"&gt;blue&lt;/span&gt;,
press the Shift key to lock the inference. Move the cursor downward and
click at the bottom of the group. While still pressing Shift key, move
the mouse upward and click at Construction line to finish the line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Press Esc key to create a new line, starting from the
intersection of the column group and the top right of the terrace roof
using the same method for the right line. After finishing the left and
the right line, connect the top of the two lines using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="ToolLine" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
to
finish drawing the inner rectangle of the column block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;To finish the column elements, press the inner side of
the column block using the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;tool.&lt;/i&gt;
until the block is completely
hollow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Delete the construction line (Guide) using &lt;i&gt;Erase&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png" /&gt;&lt;i&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click twice outside all the groups to finish editing the
group(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('umpetanFormB2');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="ButtonX" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid; height: 17px; margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em; width: 17px;" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Terasa" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/TerasB2.gif" style="width: 100%;" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Animated
Tutorial - Finishing
all the terrace elements.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;

Adding ornamental detail to the front bedroom windows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/972cf68c.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/972cf68c.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="BathDetil" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/972cf68c.png" style="border: 0px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; width: 40%;" title="Click for larger image" /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Detail shape and
dimensions of the
front window ornaments are shown at the following picture.
&lt;br /&gt;
There will be no detailed steps for adding ornamental detail to the
front bedroom window. Since the process itself is quite simple. The
tools required during this process are the&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="ToolRect" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;tool
&lt;/i&gt;and the &lt;i&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img alt="ToolPush" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" /&gt;&lt;/i&gt;tool.
&lt;br /&gt;
The key is, after a rectangle is created, the dimensions are
immediately entered using the measurement box to obtain the required
dimensions. You can use double click to repeat a pulling operation when
creating the vertical ‘pole’ of this window ornament.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can watch the modeling process on the following animation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;div class="separator"&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100%;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Fronta" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/FrontWindow.gif" style="width: 100%;" /&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Animated
Tutorial - Adding
ornamental detail to the bedroom windows.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;

Rear terrace detail&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;img align="right" alt="Teras" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/b4da75df.jpg" style="border: 1px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 30%;" /&gt;There
are not many details for the rear terrace. We just need to add a 160x80
cm floor. To avoid rain water from spilling into the house, the terrace
floor will be 3 cm lower than the interior floor.
This floor area will be covered by main roof, so no additional roof is
required.&lt;br /&gt;
No detailed steps will be provided to add this terrace.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;

We have accomplished ....&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table id="customers"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;th style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;No&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;th style="width: 445px;"&gt;T o p i c s&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Changing Field of View (FoV) so editing
an object can be done in close distance without being obstructed by
other objects. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;2&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Separating a flat surface using the
Line tool.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;3&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Entering value(s) using the measurement
box using Windows format&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Fetching components from the Google 3D
Warehouse.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;5&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Placing an object/component at the
middle of a face using Midpoint reference.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;6&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating a new object as a group so its
entities will be isolated from surrounding objects outside the group,
and editing will not disturb those objects. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;7&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using Push/Pull tool to create a new
face. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;8&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating a group within another group
(nested
group) &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;9&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating a line using the Line tool
utilizing main axes inferences. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; vertical-align: middle;"&gt;10&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Entering and exiting group using
the Select tool.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;img align="right" alt="Teras" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/d5d2e039.jpg" style="border: 0px solid; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 30%;" /&gt;By now, we have completed all the floor and
wall elements of the house. The next step of the tutorial is adding a
roof and
adding some finishing material to the floors and the walls so the model
will
appear more realistic.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Cheers&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-1063352479417415536?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/pEecwJYZxyVdsNZq6RgUbObKOt0/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/pEecwJYZxyVdsNZq6RgUbObKOt0/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/pEecwJYZxyVdsNZq6RgUbObKOt0/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/pEecwJYZxyVdsNZq6RgUbObKOt0/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/IKBz5gCMXsY" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/1063352479417415536/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=1063352479417415536&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1063352479417415536?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1063352479417415536?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/IKBz5gCMXsY/adding-interior-and-exterior-details.html" title="Adding Interior and Exterior Details" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_StepDetil.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/11/adding-interior-and-exterior-details.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;CEMCRn4zfyp7ImA9Wx9TEUo.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-7546721635485717747</id><published>2010-11-19T20:14:00.000+07:00</published><updated>2010-11-19T20:14:27.087+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-11-19T20:14:27.087+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Preparation" /><title>Prepare Yourself</title><content type="html">&lt;h3&gt;Hardware and software requirement &lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To start working with this tutorial, you need to
check whether your computer specification is capable of running
SkecthUp and
to download SketchUp software, as well as some additional files which I
will provide.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Hardware and Operating System&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Google SketchUp is released only for Windows XP /Vista/Window
7 and Mac OS X. However, this blog will only deal with the
Windows version. &lt;br&gt;
The minimum specifications required to run
SketchUp is actually quite low. Minimum requirements for running
SketchUp in Microsoft Windows XP are:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Processor: 600 MHz Processor (Version 7),&amp;nbsp; 1 GHz&amp;nbsp;
(version 8)&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;128 MB RAM (Version 7),&amp;nbsp; 512 MB RAM (version 8) &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Available disk space: 128 MB&amp;nbsp; (Version 7),&amp;nbsp; 300
MB&amp;nbsp; (Version 8)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;3-D Graphic Card that supports OpenGL version 1.5 or higher&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;(More information on this &lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?answer=36208&amp;amp;cbid=-1q0uwz95fvip4&amp;amp;src=cb&amp;amp;lev=topic"
target="_blank"&gt;link&lt;/a&gt;) &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Currently, it is very difficult to find computers with such low
specification, even from used computers. On-board graphics card
with 3-D capability and Open GL 1.5 have been around for quite
sometime. Therefore, in general, hardware is not an issue to
model with
SketchUp. However, the above minimum specification will restrict you
from modeling rather large / complex 3d models. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Actually, the computer requirement will depend on the
complexity of the model you are making. Most of the time, I use a
1.83MHz Dual Core Notebook, with 1 GB RAM, nVIDIA Graphic Processor
On-Board running under
MS Windows Vista Business. This is sufficient for my modeling needs. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Up to the current version (version 8.0), SketchUp has
not been able to take full advantage of parallel procesing capability
of
multi core computers. Thus, there is no guarantee that SketchUp will be
running faster on a computer with dual core processors compared to a
single core one (e.i. Pentium IV).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;It is not the case with video card (GPU). SketchUp will definitely
works faster if your computer has a dedicated video card (in notebook
computer it is often mentioned as dedicated memory for video). Even if
it is only 128 MB. It should be noted, it is suggested that the video
card should be nVIDIA processor, not ATI nor&amp;nbsp; Intel &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;So is with your computer memory (RAM), the bigger the better. The
maximum memory is only limited by your operating system. Though,
Microsoft Windows XP/
Vista 32-bit can only hold a maximum of 4 GB RAM.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Software Requirement and other files&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The only software required is a &lt;em&gt;Google SketchUp&lt;/em&gt; (free) for
Windows.
Actually, you can also install SketchUp Pro from the beginning. You can
use the Pro version for 8 hours (usage time) without a license.
Thereafter, if you don't enter a valid license key, it will
automatically become a free version. But I suggest for the
moment, you need to install only the Free version. When you have some
mastery with SketchUp, you may need to install the Pro version since
there are some features that are only available in Pro Version, such as
making neat hardcopies of your model (with scale, annotation, and
all). &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); width: 210px; font-family: verdana; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; font-size: 70%;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Download&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a
href="http://dl.google.com/sketchup/GoogleSketchUpWEN.exe"
target="_blank"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Sketchup for Windows&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html"
target="_blank"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Quicky Components&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/download/bonuspacks6.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Sketchup 6 Bonus Pack&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a
href="http://dl.google.com/sketchup/gsu7/docs/en/SketchUp7Help.pdf"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic;"&gt;Sketchup 7 Manual/pdf &lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
(All SketchUp 8 documentation and support content is currently
maintained online and isn't available for download) &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt; also provide you with some ready made Sketchup components
(Quicky). As the name suggest, they can speed up the modeling of
your home. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The components are a hinged door component, a sliding door
(both can be set a to be a single/double leaf door), a window component
that can be configured with each other to have some alternative shapes.
Each of this component can be configured down to the jamb/header and
rabbet dimensions. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Another Quicky is a stair component (with option for straight
and letter-u stair) that can also flexibly be configured to shape
the most crazy stair design you can imagine. The final quicky component
is a spiral stair components. This will come handy if you want to
design a stair in a rather restricted area. Just like a
straight/u-shape stair, the height of the each rise, the total height
is also configurable to your liking. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;All of these components are Dynamic Component, a new breed of
component introduced since SketchUp version 7.0. These component can be
sized simply by mouse clicks and drags, while maintaing their core
specification such as jambs/threads etc. Doors and Window
component has opening/closing animation ability for you to play around.
A more detaled discussion about this will be available in Quickies
Anyone (&lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Part One&lt;/a&gt; and Part Two)&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 1em; width: 480px; font-family: verdana; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 65%;"
align="center" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Recomendation&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Which version&lt;/span&gt;?&lt;br&gt;
This blog was prepared using Google SketcUp version 7.x free version,
However it is no longer avalailable on their site. I've used the 8
version and confirmed that all the steps and instructions provided in
this blog are still valid. &lt;br&gt;
If you are not too sure, you can &lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/support/bin/answer.py?hl=en&amp;amp;answer=60107"
target="_blank"&gt;dowmload&lt;/a&gt; and install SkectUp 7.x pro and use it
untill the pro trial expires AND also install Sketchup 8 just for the
fun of it since different versions can co-exist.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Requirement for Internet Connection &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In version 6, SketchUp by default will install several basic
components (such as doors, chairs and other items) to our computer
(local hardisk). Since SU 7.x, components are no longer stored locally,
but are available on demand&amp;nbsp; from &lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/" target="_blank"&gt;Google
3d Warehouse&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: georgia;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;I do not really like this
workflow. Up till now I still keep all the components that I like
locally. Whenever there is a need for another component, I'll look
through the internet (not just on Google 3d Warehouse) and then save it
in
local a folder. For me, "always on connection" is not required. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Google still provide you with all previous components and materials
for you to download and install onto your computer (Sketchup 6 Bonus
Pack).
This component is 100% compatible with SU Version 7 and above. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-7546721635485717747?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Dpx9KMMiBGSIXEg9huK47HtphTw/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Dpx9KMMiBGSIXEg9huK47HtphTw/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Dpx9KMMiBGSIXEg9huK47HtphTw/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Dpx9KMMiBGSIXEg9huK47HtphTw/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/eOGHVBs0lpI" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/7546721635485717747/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=7546721635485717747&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/7546721635485717747?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/7546721635485717747?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/eOGHVBs0lpI/prepare-yourself.html" title="Prepare Yourself" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/prepare-yourself.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;D0AGQnszfyp7ImA9WxBVEUQ.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-5320155932577682812</id><published>2010-02-15T07:20:00.003+07:00</published><updated>2010-02-15T08:02:03.587+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-02-15T08:02:03.587+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Freebies" /><title>Bathroom Components</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;&lt;p&gt;There are hundreds of bathroom related components ready to download
from the 3d warehouse. Some are of high quality and some are not.
Nevertheless, I still need to create some bathroom components for my
house modeling projects.
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The main reason is that I need to model with objects that are as close
as possible in size and shape with the real sanitary ware / plumbing
hardware I am going to use during the house construction. So, I will be able to study room ergonomics more accurately. This is not
always fulfilled by the warehouse. By creating the components, I can also control the file size since I need to compromise between shapes and file sizes. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
 &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Notice that there are no small appliances, such as faucet added the
bathroom, since such detail may only be required when we need to design a detailed bathroom interior.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;All components that I refer here are available in the Google 3D Warehouse&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Project One Bathroom&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/ProjectOne-Bathroom-1.jpg" style="border: 1px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1.75em; width: 35%;" alt="TraditionalBath" align="left"&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The bathroom is very small so can only be filled with two components: a set of shower corner and a toilet.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The shower set consists of one shower head and a mixer. To keep
water from splashing everywhere, a plastic shower curtain is installed
covering the entire corner. The floor corner will be recessed so the
rest of the floor will be relatively dry. &lt;br&gt;The lower part of all the wall will be covered with ceramic tiles, also to keep the bathroom dry.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Bathroom Toilet&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=192aaa64142526ceda9dc40966f7208a" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Toto_CW821J.png" title="Click at the image to open the 3D Warehouse page" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: -0.75em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 25%;" alt="Squat" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Most
of the toilets in the Google 3D Warehouse have rather large dimensions,
and the model is not always available in my country. So I made myself a
toilet component based on a toilet made by Toto, a 6/3L Dual Flush
CW821J types as shown in the photo. I like this model because it only has a
footprint of 71x40 cm. Suitable for a small bathroom.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Size wise, this toilet component is very close to the real toilet
because it is made based on an existing CAD files available on their
website. However, some of the curves are omitted to make its file size
reasonably small. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Click at the toilet image to open the respective component's page in
the 3d warehouse. Save the component to sub folder \Components for easy
access.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Shower Corner&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=eb33710489ca445bb61a57665ac4c2d" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/543a736a.png" title="Klik pada gambar untuk membuka 3D Warehouse" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.1em; margin-right: 2em; width: 30%;" alt="Squat" align="left"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;As
the name implies, this component is used for a corner bathroom shower
with a plastic curtain to contain water splash.
The shower set included in this component is created by Google. I just
added a shower rail and a plastic curtain. This 80x80 cm shower box is
200 cm tall.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;You may need to rotate and/or to flip this component so it will fit into any bathroom corner you choose.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Click at the toilet image to open the respective component's page in
the 3d warehouse. Save the component to sub folder &lt;em&gt;\Components&lt;/em&gt; for easy
access.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h5&gt;An alternative for the Shower Set&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=d6e31e38a220af2cb61a57665ac4c2d" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/69407b83.png" title="Klik untuk membuka 3D Warehouse" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 15%;" alt="Bak mandi" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;This
is a of more realistic shower set in term of shape and size. I made
this component based on a 3D model downloaded from the Grohe site. I
import the 3d model into SketchUp and reduce its polygons so that its
file size is not too large.
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The shower set consists of a Tempesta shower head and shower bar and
a Concetto single-lever shower mixer. This component is based on a 3d
model available from Grohe official website, so the size and shape are
close to the original.
I suggest that this component is only used when the house modeling is
finished so as not to burden the processor.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Click at the toilet image to open the respective component's page in
the 3d warehouse. Save the component to sub folder &lt;em&gt;\Components&lt;/em&gt; for easy
access.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Downloading the Components&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Browser-Bathroom.png" style="margin: 1em 1em 1em -3px; width: 35%;" alt="WarehouseDirect" align="left"&gt;

&lt;p&gt;We can download each component directly to our model from the Google
3d warehouse using the Components Browser as if they were in your local
folders. Since there are thousands of components already in the
warehouse. We need to enter a few unique keywords to filter our search.
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Open menu -&amp;gt; Window -&amp;gt; Components. Enter the keyword "&lt;em&gt;freebies harrynov&amp;nbsp;bathroom&lt;/em&gt;

in the search field and click Search, it will display the model /
component that I have posted in the warehouse with bathroom tag. Select
any component just like you normally do when adding a component from
your local folder. The component will be downloaded when it is placed
in the model.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 290px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Saving components
downloaded suing the Window components to your
local folder&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;Components
added directly to your model using the window components are stored
only in your model. To save them to your local folder we must go back
to the Components Window and click the &lt;em&gt;In Model&lt;/em&gt; &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" style="margin: -1.6em 0.3em -1em; width: 20px;" alt="InModel" align="middle"&gt; button to display all components stored in the model.
Right Click at the component you want to save to activate a context
menu and choose 'save as' to save it to your local folder.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;


    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;

&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To avoid having to always download the same component over
and over again from the 3d warehouse, you should later save each of
these Quickies to a local folder. Save all the components to sub folder
\Components for later use.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br&gt;

&lt;br&gt;

&lt;em&gt;Enjoy!&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-5320155932577682812?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Tu77Ke4JEIn3p8x5VuIgzZ9tSUs/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Tu77Ke4JEIn3p8x5VuIgzZ9tSUs/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Tu77Ke4JEIn3p8x5VuIgzZ9tSUs/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Tu77Ke4JEIn3p8x5VuIgzZ9tSUs/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/esALlVFb0iw" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/5320155932577682812/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=5320155932577682812&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5320155932577682812?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5320155932577682812?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/esALlVFb0iw/bathroom-components.html" title="Bathroom Components" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/bathroom-components.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;AkMGRX87cSp7ImA9WxBWFUo.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-2209904654450640389</id><published>2010-02-07T15:22:00.006+07:00</published><updated>2010-02-08T04:33:44.109+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-02-08T04:33:44.109+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Project I" /><title>Placing the Windows</title><content type="html">&lt;h4&gt;Quicky-Window Component&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em;" align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(51, 102, 255);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold; color: white;"&gt;Previous 3D Model&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapters in a project are
expected to be done in chronological order.
However, if you want to start from this chapter, please download the
last model created from previous lesson(s) from &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=19a82179f7209e2bf4b8f2b0446072a" target="_blank"&gt;the 3D warehouse.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Windows in Project One modeling have different shapes and sizes.
However, we will only use and reuse one of the Quicky components: &lt;a href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html#Quicky-Window" target="_blank"&gt;Quicky-Window&lt;/a&gt;.
Some windows consist of a single window component, and some are
stitched with other window/door component(s) in order to produce
different variations of the window. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Just like a Quicky-door, this component does not have ornamental
detail that normally appears in window assembly such as raised panels
or moldings.
However, this
component includes detailed&amp;nbsp; typical specifications of a wooden
window, except for glass
thickness.&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The main options of a Quick-window component are as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
  &lt;li&gt; &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/a1a51725.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 225px;" alt="QuickJendela" align="right"&gt;(a) indicates the side of the window
structure where its sash
will be pivoted. This side is labeled as A. All other sides (B, C, and
D) are labeled clockwise. The term “width” is applicable when side A or
C are on top.&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Also labeled as “D”, indicates the “height” of the component. &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Thickness of the jamb/head, measured at the sides that will be
attached to a wall. &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Depth of the rabbet, the recess or offset formed in the jamb/head
to receive window sash.&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Sash thickness.&lt;/li&gt;

  &lt;li&gt;Sash width.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Sash net width.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Windows Basic Dimension&lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;To simplify the house modeling, some windows will have the same
dimension but with different variations. You can modify windows
dimension to your taste later. &lt;/p&gt;

  &lt;p&gt;Windows common specifications are as follows:&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;ul type="circle"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Jamb/head width/thickness: 5 × 15 cm. &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Sash thickness and width: 4 × 8cm &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Windows height: All windows are placed so the uppers side of
each
window is parallel with the top side of the doors. &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ul&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Placing Front Bedroom Windows&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;
The front bedroom has two identical windows with these specifications: &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Each sash will pivot at the window head.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Structural height and width are 150 cm and 75 cm respectively.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;The west window&amp;nbsp; is placed 40 cm away from the west wall.&lt;/li&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;Space between windows is 15 cm.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Maximum opening is 20° (Optional, for animation purpose only).&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;We will start by adding the west window by placing a Quicky-Window
in the location and change the dimension to its specification using &lt;em&gt;Component
Options&lt;/em&gt; window. To distinguish it from other windows, it will be
renamed to Window_W1.&lt;br&gt;
After Window_W1 is placed at its designated location, it will be copied
to create the other window using
  &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. &lt;br&gt;

Unlike when installing doors, during windows installation, we
immediately create a hole in the wall with &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool &lt;/em&gt;and &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt; &lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaJ1J2');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;div style="display: none;" id="JendelaJ1J2"&gt;
  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Placing Window_J1&lt;/h5&gt;
      &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Options-Window_W1.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="EntityInfo" align="right"&gt;This window is obtained directly from
the Quickies folder in Windows components:&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Set your view/camera so the bedroom front wall and the
front
door can be seen clearly.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Open Component window and select Quickies folder. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click at Quicky-Door component and place the component at a
temporary location on the front bedroom wall&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Right Click at the new placed Quicky-Window to activate the
Context menu and select &lt;em&gt;Dynamic Components -&amp;gt; Component Options&lt;/em&gt;.
        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Change some of component’s option (see image, highlighted
in
yellow) to adjust to the required specifications.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click Apply and close &lt;em&gt;Component Options&lt;/em&gt; window.&lt;/li&gt;

      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Renaming the Window into "Window_W1"&lt;/h5&gt;
      &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Entity-Window_W1.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="EntityInfo" align="right"&gt;It's a good practice to always give a
unique name to each
component/group we created/added that could easily identify the actual
object it represents simply from its name. This will make it easier -
for example - to make a purchase list and to manage the model later.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Right click at the Quicky-Window component to active
Context
Menu and select Entity Info. &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Rename "Definition Name" entry with [Window_W1] then close
the window. (Leave the Name entry blank for the time being).&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Placing the window to its designated location&lt;/h5&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the top right
corner of the window. &lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Move the mouse up or down, parallel with the blue axis&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; When the green &lt;em&gt;inference&lt;/em&gt; appears, press and hold
the [Shift] key to lock the inference. Point your mouse to any of the
front door top corners and click at that point to make the window has
the same height with the front door. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Next - still with the Move / Copy Tool - click the top left
corner of the window and slide the window component to the left/right
parallel to the red Axis. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; When the red &lt;em&gt;inference&lt;/em&gt; appears, press and hold
the
[Shift] key to lock the inference. Point your mouse to the inner corner
of the left wall and click at that point to place the window
temporarily at the wall corner.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Since the window is supposed to be 40 cm away from the
present location, move again the to the right parallel with the red
axis. Without clicking the mouse, type in [40] and press [Enter] to
place the window at its designated location. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Adding the Second Window&lt;/h5&gt;
The second window has the same shape and size to Window_W1. Therefore,
we simply need to copy the window using &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and place the copy to have a 15
cm space&amp;nbsp; from the original. &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;
          &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
            &lt;tbody&gt;
              &lt;tr&gt;
                &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;

                &lt;/td&gt;
              &lt;/tr&gt;
              &lt;tr&gt;
                &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Move/Copy Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" style="margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolMove" align="right"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Move/Copy tool can be used to move or to copy objects already in the
model. &lt;br&gt;
Press [Ctrl] key to toggle between Move to Copy or vice versa.
During Copy mode, the cursor will change into &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/8e06482e.png" style="width: 25px; height: 25px;" alt="CursorCopy" class="tools"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
We will use this move/copy method when both the original/ target
locations are within our view&lt;br&gt;
                &lt;/td&gt;

              &lt;/tr&gt;
            &lt;/tbody&gt;
          &lt;/table&gt;
Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;b&gt;immediately &lt;/b&gt; Press
[Ctrl] key to toggle Copy mode &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click at the top left corner of Window_W1 and slide it to
the
right (parallel to the red axis). &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Without clicking the mouse, type in [85] using the keyboard
and press [Enter]
to make a duplicate copy of Window_W1 with a 15 cm space between both
windows. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Creating Wall Opening&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/h5&gt;
As in placing door components, we need to manually create a wall
opening for every window we place in the model using &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool.&lt;/em&gt;

Simply because screen capture reason, I create the wall opening from
inside the room. You can do it from the outside.
. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the Rectangle tool and click at the top left corner
of
one of the windows and click again at the bottom right corner of the
window. SketchUp will provide you with information when the mouse is at
the right point by generating "End Point" or "End Point in Component"
hints. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Do the same procedure to the other window so each will be
covered with a rectangle.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull tool&lt;/em&gt; and press the inner side of
the rectangle according to wall thickness to create wall opening. Use
the top edge to the opposite wall side as a reference. &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Repeat (c) to the other window.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaJ1J2');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;

      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Window1.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="Room1Windows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Adding the
Front Bedroom Windows&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;

  &lt;h4&gt;Adding the Front Door Window.&lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;The front door window sash has the same dimensions with the front
bedrooms sash. However, this window is actually part of the front door,
since this window is attached to one side of the front door jamb.&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;We are going to copy one of the front window using &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.
In addition, since the window is attached to one of the front door
jambs, we need to “remove” one of the window jambs so it can be
stitched nicely as if both the window and door is one component.
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaP1');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;div style="display: none;" id="JendelaP1"&gt;
  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;Move the camera/view so that both the front door and the
bedroom
windows can be seen clearly.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Click the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click again
at the right front bedroom window&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and immediately press [Ctrl] to
toggle copy mode. Click again at the left top corner of a bedroom
window.&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Move the mouse parallel to Red Axis. When the red inference
appears, lock it with the [Shift] key.&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Release the mouse at any temporary location to the right of the
front door.&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
        &lt;tbody&gt;

          &lt;tr&gt;
            &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
            &lt;/td&gt;
          &lt;/tr&gt;
          &lt;tr&gt;
            &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Dynamic Component
Option Window&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Dynamic Component Option can also be activated through the Dynamic
toolbar
Component. &lt;br&gt;

Leave this window open when you often &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/b5b7ba8c.png" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-right: -2em; width: 70%;" alt="DynComTool" align="left"&gt; need to see/ edit Dynamic
Component options. &lt;/td&gt;
          &lt;/tr&gt;
        &lt;/tbody&gt;
      &lt;/table&gt;
In order to seamlessly attach the window to the front door, the window
left jamb must be hidden, since it will use the door’s jamb &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click at the window using the Select tool&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Press &lt;em&gt;Component Option&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/b9f7e058.png" alt="ToolComOption" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;
to open &lt;em&gt;Dynamic Component Options Window&lt;/em&gt;. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Change the Hidden Side selection from “None” to “Side D”. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Press [Apply] to finish the option change.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;

    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Attach the window to the Front door:&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and immediately press [Ctrl]
and click again at the left top corner of the window.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Move the cursor and click at the front door top right
corner
to attach the window to the door.&lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Create a wall opening so the window will completely go through
the wall:&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 4.5em;" align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
        &lt;tbody&gt;
          &lt;tr&gt;

            &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
            &lt;/td&gt;
          &lt;/tr&gt;
          &lt;tr&gt;
            &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Push/Pull Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" style="margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolMove" align="right"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Pushing/puling process may be suspended when it is blocked by other
object(s).
Sometimes the push / pull will stop altogether if the blocking object
is a line or an edge of another object. &lt;br&gt;
            &lt;/td&gt;

          &lt;/tr&gt;
        &lt;/tbody&gt;
      &lt;/table&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; Click at the top left corner of the window and make
another
click at the bottom right corner to create a rectangle the same size
with the window. &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and push the inner face of the
rectangle until &lt;em&gt;on face&lt;/em&gt; or &lt;em&gt;offset
limited to 15&lt;/em&gt; hint appears ob your screen. The push/pull operation
is blocked by the inner side of the wall. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Release the mouse button to finish.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;

    &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaP1');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
  &lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Window3.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="FrontWindow" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;

      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Adding a
Window to the Front Door&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Adding the Rear Door Window&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/h4&gt;

  &lt;p&gt;
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 2em; margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 4.5em;" align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;

      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" style="margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolMove" align="right"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Components
Browser's In Model Tab&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
The In-model tab lists all components that are attached in the model.
We can copy, remove and edit any of these components. &lt;br&gt;
Notice that, this library contains all components including those that
have been previously deleted. Components will be completely removed
from a model if the model is purged. &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;

  &lt;p&gt;The rear door window is a mirror image of the front door window.
We
will make another copy of Window_W1. However, instead of copying
directly from the window, we are going to use the Components window’s
“In Model” &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" alt="InModel" class="tools"&gt;tab. We will also\o create a wall opening
prior to copying the window using the &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool.&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaP4');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;div style="display: none;" id="JendelaP4"&gt;
  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;

      &lt;h5&gt;Creating a wall opening.&lt;/h5&gt;
At the moment, we don’t need to make an accurate wall opening size,
since it can easily be adjusted later after the window has been
installed. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Set your view/camera so the rear door wall can be seen
clearly from the outside&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the top left
corner of the rear door.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Move your mouse down to the left to create a rectangle that
approximately larger than the window size. Ensure that the rectangle is
not exceeding to the floor or to the bathroom wall. Undo and recreate
the rectangle if necessary&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and push the rectangle face
until "&lt;em&gt;on face&lt;/em&gt;" or &lt;em&gt;offset limited to 15&lt;/em&gt; hint
appears. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click the left button to finish.&lt;/li&gt;

      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Copying Window_W1 and hide one of the jambs.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/h5&gt;
Since the Window_W1 location is quite far, it will be a bit difficult
to copy directly from the window. So, instead, we will make a copy of
the window from The In model&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" alt="InModel" class="tools"&gt; tab of the Components browser..&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/InModel-Window_W1.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="InModel-Window_W1" align="right"&gt;Reveal the Components browser
using Window -&amp;gt; Components and click at the "In Model"&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" alt="InModel" class="tools"&gt; button to show all components currently
in our model. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; Select "Window_W1" and place it in the wall opening.&lt;br&gt;
Make sure that the window is laying flat on the wall. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Using the Dynamic Component Option window, hide Side-B side
of the window jamb using so that it can be attached seamlessly to the
rear door.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/li&gt;

      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Moving the window to its location and resizing the wall
opening.&lt;/h5&gt;
We created the wall opening to have the same height with the rear door.
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the newly added window using the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the top right
corner of the window.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click once again at the top left corner of the door to
attach
the newly copied window to the rear door.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;
And click on part of the wall opening that should be attached to the
bottom of the window. Drag the mouse to the bottom and click on the
position. &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Repeat the same procedure to close any gap between the wall
and the window.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaP4');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
  &lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;

      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Window4.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="BackWindow" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp; Adding a
Window to the Rear Door&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;

  &lt;/table&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Adding the Bathroom Window&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;The bathroom window has a difference specification:&lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;ol type="circle"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Height/Width :&amp;nbsp; 50/70 cm.&lt;/li&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;Sash Width : 6 cm.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Location of the window is right in the middle of the bathroom
interior wall. &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;Similar to the installation of the rear door window, we will first
make a wall opening and then place a new Quicky window in it.
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;div&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaKM');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;div style="display: none;" id="JendelaKM"&gt;

  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Creating a wall opening.&lt;/h5&gt;
Make a hole in the wall approximately larger than the bathroom window.
The upper side of the hole must also be parallel with the upper side of
any of the doors.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Move the camera so that the bathroom exterior wall and
the rear door can be seen clearly.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click on the bathroom wall
somewhere between the floor and the east bathroom wall&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Point your mouse at the upper left corner of the front door
window until “End point” or “Endpoint in Component” hint appears. Do
not click your mouse just yet. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; Move the mouse horizontally to the left parallel to the
Red
axis direction. When the red &lt;em&gt;inference&lt;/em&gt; line appears,
immediately press [Shift] key to lock the inference.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Move the mouse to somewhere near the bathroom interior west
wall and click to create a rectangle.Ensure that the rectangle is not
exceeding to the floor or to any of the bathroom walls. Undo and
recreate the rectangle if necessary &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and push the rectangle face
until "on face" or offset limited to 15 hint appears. &lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click the left button to finish.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Adding the Bathroom Window&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;

    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Add a new Quicky-Window from the Components browser and place
it so that it will lay flat somewhere near the hole we just created.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Right click the newly placed Quick-Windows to activate the
Context Menu and select Dynamic Components -&amp;gt; Component Option. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Set some of the component’s options as specified above.&lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Click [Apply] and close the Component Options window.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;/ol&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Moving the window to its designated location. &lt;/h5&gt;
The location of the bathroom window is right in the middle of the
bathroom wall.
Placing an object in the middle &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/ff23f81c.gif" style="border: 2px solid ; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.2em; width: 250px;" alt="MidPoint" align="right"&gt;of something can be easily done in
SketchUp because its inference engine will automatically show a small
blue point and display "Midpoint" inference when we hover our mouse
using some of the tools near/at the middle point of an edge. See the
following image to see where the middle point of the bathroom wall.
.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the new window.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and point the mouse to
somewhere near the middle of the top edge to the window. Click once
when a blue dot and “Midpoint” or “Midpoint in Component” inference
appears to grab the window by its top midpoint. &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt; Move the mouse horizontally to the right/left parallel to
the Red axis direction. When the red &lt;em&gt;inference&lt;/em&gt; line appears,
immediately press [Shift] key to lock the inference.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Next - still with the Move/Copy tool - point your mouse to
the bathroom middle point as indicated in the above illustration. &lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click your mouse when the blue dot and "Midpoint" inference
appear. This will place the new window exactly in the middle of the
bathroom interior wall.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Still using the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;,
click at one the window top corner and move the window using the blue
axis inference to place the window as to have the same height with the
rear door/window.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Resizing the Wall Opening&lt;/h5&gt;
Fix the wall opening so there will be no gap between the bathroom
window and the wall opening using &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; just like we did with the rear
door window.&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaKM');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;

  &lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Window5.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="BathroomWindow" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp; Adding
the
Bathroom Window&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Adding the rear Bedroom window&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;The rear bedroom window has these following specification:&lt;/p&gt;

  &lt;ol type="circle"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;This is a casement window with two sashes that swing open on
side
hinges.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;The net width and net height of the window pane are: 52 and
92&amp;nbsp;cm. &lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;Sash width : 6 cm.&lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;The window vertical position is exactly in the middle of the
rear
bedroom wall.&lt;/li&gt;

  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;From the above specifications, it can be determined that the
window
is
made from two Quick-Window components. The two window components have
the same dimension but will be mirrored to each other.
First, we prepare a Quicky-Window as the left window, and rotate it so
the hinged side will be on the left. Afterward, we set its dimensions
as specified earlier and hide the connecting side of the jambs.
For the right part of the window, we will make a copy of the left
window and rotate it by 180° so they will mirror to each other.
Finally, we will attach both windows before placing it at its
designated location. Everything is done using the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaKTBelakang');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
  &lt;div style="display: none;" id="JendelaKTBelakang"&gt;
  &lt;ol type="1"&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Placing a Quicky-Window.&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Move the camera/view so that the bedroom wall and the rear
door
can be seen clearly from the outside. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/c4910233.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 0.5em; width: 140px;" alt="Rotate" align="right"&gt;Add a new Quicky-Window from the Components
browser and place at a temporary location on the rear bedroom wall &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and point your mouse to the
middle of the window until a blue bounding box with four red plus signs
appear as illustrated.&lt;/li&gt;

      &lt;li&gt;Click at the right plus sign and move it upward. Then,
without
clicking your mouse, type in [90] and press enter. This will rotate the
window exactly 90° to the left. &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Changing the window dimensions and options.&lt;/h5&gt;
The window pane dimension is 50x90 cm. Taking into account the the jamb
width and the rabbet depth, we will come up with a 60x90cm window size.
Since the window has been rotated by 90, the structural width and
length must be interchanged. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the new
placed window.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Click at &lt;em&gt;Component Option&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/b9f7e058.png" alt="ToolComOption" class="tools"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and change this
options:&lt;br&gt;
          &lt;ul style="list-style-type: circle;"&gt;
            &lt;li&gt;Change the structural width to 100 cm and length to 60
cm. (Remember we previously rotated this component).&lt;/li&gt;
            &lt;li&gt;Set "Hidden Side" to [Side-D]&lt;/li&gt;
            &lt;li&gt;Set "Max Opening to 180°.&lt;br&gt;

            &lt;/li&gt;
          &lt;/ul&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Press [Apply] to finish. &lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;

      &lt;h5&gt;Adding the right side of the window.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/h5&gt;
The right side of the bedroom window is a mirror image of the left
side. Therefore, we only need to copy that part of the window and
rotate it by 180° and attach them into one window.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the new placed
window.&lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and immediately press [Ctrl]
key to toggle Copy mode.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Move your mouse parallel with the red axis and click at a
temporary location where the copied window does not overlap with the
original.&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Point your mouse to the middle of the window until a blue
bounding box with four red plus signs appear, as we did in 1(c).&lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;Click at the right plus sign and move it upward. Then,
without
clicking your mouse, type in [180] and press enter. This will rotate
the
window exactly 180° to the left. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;

    &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Combining the two components. &lt;/h5&gt;
In addition to attaching both windows together. it will be easier to
manage these two components, for example to find their&amp;nbsp; midpoint,
or paint it with material, if we combine these two separate components
into one group. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;ol type="a"&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;

          &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
            &lt;tbody&gt;
              &lt;tr&gt;
                &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
                &lt;/td&gt;
              &lt;/tr&gt;
              &lt;tr&gt;

                &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Group&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
We can combine several different objects into one group so it will be
easier, for instance, to move/copy or to paint all objects in the group
in as if they were only one object. &lt;/td&gt;
              &lt;/tr&gt;
            &lt;/tbody&gt;
          &lt;/table&gt;
Select the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;,
click at the top left corner of the new added window and move it to the
right top corner of the original window so both window will attach to
each other.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;

        &lt;li&gt;Choose the &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the left
Quicky-Window component until it is selected (with blue bounding box).
Then, immediately press and hold [Ctrl] key and the cursor will change
into &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/1080c230.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;. At this state, any other object
clicked will be included in the selection.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/li&gt;
        &lt;li&gt;After both windows have been selected, activate the Context
Menu and select “Make Group”. &lt;/li&gt;
      &lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;

    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Moving the window to its designated location&lt;/h5&gt;
Move the window using the &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" alt="ToolMove" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. Use its top edge’s midpoint
and rear bedroom wall midpoint as reference. (See: Placing the bathroom
window) &lt;/li&gt;
    &lt;li&gt;
      &lt;h5&gt;Create a wall opening&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/h5&gt;

As usual, create an opening on the wall using the &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" alt="ToolRect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" alt="ToolPush" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. &lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;/ol&gt;
  &lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('JendelaKTBelakang');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
  &lt;/div&gt;

  
  &lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Window6.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindow" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Adding the
Rear Bedroom Window&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;
  &lt;h4&gt;Lesson Learned ....&lt;/h4&gt;
  &lt;table id="customers"&gt;
    &lt;tbody&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;th style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;No&lt;/th&gt;
        &lt;th style="width: 445px;"&gt;T o p i c&lt;/th&gt;

      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Renaming an object using the
Entity Info window.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;2&lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Create a copy of a component
using Move/Copy tool and [Ctrl] Key &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;3&lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating a hole on a wall using "on
Face" or " offset limited to ..." inference.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;

      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Hiding one of jambs/heads of a
Quick-Window Component so it can be attached to other door/window.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;5&lt;br&gt;

        &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Copying/Adding a component
from
other components already attached in the model using "In model" tab of
the&lt;br&gt;
Components browser.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;6&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;

        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Finding middle point of an
edge
using Midpoint inferences to drag and to place an object in relation to
other object's midpoint.&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;7&lt;br&gt;
        &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Rotating an object by its
center
point using the
Move/Copy tool. &lt;/td&gt;

      &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;tr&gt;
        &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;8&lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Combining two or more objects into
one
group
using Context Menu -&amp;gt; Make Group.&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;/tbody&gt;
  &lt;/table&gt;

  &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/c08debf9.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 35%;" alt="Teras" align="left"&gt;We are almost half way to finishing our 3d
model. Next we will furnish some detail to this model prior to putting
some roof to the model.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/p&gt;
  &lt;em&gt;Enjoy&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-2209904654450640389?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/2JZoRIVH2ghfIjkN--BF1rfBSYU/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/2JZoRIVH2ghfIjkN--BF1rfBSYU/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/2JZoRIVH2ghfIjkN--BF1rfBSYU/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/2JZoRIVH2ghfIjkN--BF1rfBSYU/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/D8lkt6nzSCU" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/2209904654450640389/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=2209904654450640389&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/2209904654450640389?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/2209904654450640389?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/D8lkt6nzSCU/placing-windows.html" title="Placing the Windows" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_StepDetil.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/placing-windows.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;D0cMQXw7fip7ImA9WxBWE04.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-2648684249739048066</id><published>2010-02-01T11:26:00.010+07:00</published><updated>2010-02-05T08:58:00.206+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-02-05T08:58:00.206+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Project I" /><title>Adding Doors to Our 3D Model</title><content type="html">&lt;h4&gt;Quick-Door Component &lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em;" align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(51, 102, 255);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold; color: white;"&gt;Previous 3D Model&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Chapters in a project are
expected to be done in chronological order.
However, if you want to start from this chapter, please download the
last model created from previous lesson(s) from &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=89647fb6af1fc81fb61a57665ac4c2d" target="_blank"&gt; the 3D warehouse.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The one and only door component used for the entire Project I is
a &lt;a href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html#Quicky-Door" target="_blank"&gt;Quick-Door dynamic Component.&lt;/a&gt; Although you can use
other
components, but I suggest we stick with this component because of it
can be
sized&amp;nbsp; accurately and scaled easily.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Because the goal is to create SketchUp 3-Model quickly and
accurately, these components do not have ornamental details such as
panels and fancy handles. When you have finished the entire house
design and
satisfy will all the dimensions, you can replace them with more better
looking components or may be you can be happy by applying some wood
pattern to these components. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/DoorDetail.png" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 65%;" alt="Door Detail" align="right"&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The main options of a Quick-Door component are as follows:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Structural width. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Structural height &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Jamb thickness. For wooden frame, usually the same with wall
thickness,&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;First door leaf&amp;nbsp; net width (non editable)&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Door leave thickness.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Second door leave width (0 if none) &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Rabbet depth &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Jamb width. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Doors Basic Dimension&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Here are some common door specification we use during the Project
One modeling:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type="circle"&gt;&lt;li&gt;All doors height are 210 cm.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Jamb thickness is the same with wall thickness (15cm).&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Jam width: 5 cm. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Door leaves thickness: 4 cm&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Structural opening varies between 80, 90 and 100
cm.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When a door is placed near a wall corner, a 3 cm space will be
added between the door and the wall corner,&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Adding bedroom doors.&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Additional specification:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: -1em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Placing and Moving
Component&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Placing component into a model will automatically invoke &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy
tool&lt;/em&gt;. Active at its insertion point. &lt;br&gt;
An insertion point is the component's axes. Normally, the axes is
placed at one of the component's corner.
Use this point as the focus when placing a component to your model. &lt;br&gt;
If somehow the new placed component is not selected because you click
something else, select it using &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; tool and proceed with the
component placement. &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;ol type="circle"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Both bedroom doors are 90 cm wide. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;The rear bedroom door has left hand swing and the front bedroom
door has right hand swing. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;First, add the rear bedroom door by placing a Quick Door component
on the designated wall right at the floor line. Adjust door
specification using &lt;em&gt;Component Options&lt;/em&gt; window. Move the
component so it is exactly 3 cm away from a wall corner and use &lt;em&gt;Measurement
Box&lt;/em&gt; to ensure accuracy by typing [3] from your keyboard
immediately after moving the component.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Use the same procedure for the front bedroom door and change it to
a left swing door by flipping it using Context Menu -&amp;gt;
Flip Along -&amp;gt; Component’s red.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuKamarTidur');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h4&gt; &lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="PintuKamarTidur"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Adding the rear bedroom door.&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt; &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt; &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Options-Door.png" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="Rear Bedroom Wall" align="right"&gt; Set your view/camera so most
the east bedroom wall can be seen clearly &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Open Component window and select Quicky folder. &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Click at Quick-Door component and point the mouse to the line
separating the floor and the bedroom wall. Left Click to place the
component on
that temporary location. &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;To see the component’s dimension, active Context Menu
by right-clicking the door component and select Dynamic Components
-&amp;gt; Component Option.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; Since all options do not need further adjustment, close the
Component Options window.&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Placing the rear bedroom door to its designated location.&lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;div&gt;

    &lt;p&gt; The doors is positioned 3 cm away from the wall separating the
two bedrooms. Move the door along the floor line to a point which is
parallel to the corner. If the component is already selected, you may
start from (b). Otherwise you will have to start from step (a) and use &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;/p&gt;
    &lt;table style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
      &lt;tbody&gt;

        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;b&gt;Tips
and Trick&lt;/b&gt; &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;

        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Auto Select&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;

Most
SketchUp tools are able to auto select
an object just by hovering on it,
An object is selected if it is highlighted in blue box/lines. Auto
select is active only when no object is already selected. Press [Esc]
to unselect any object or use &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; to individually select an
object. &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;/tbody&gt;

    &lt;/table&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Use Select Tool and click at the newly placed door component
then select Move/copy tool. (see: T&lt;em&gt;ips and Trick&lt;/em&gt;). &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Click at the top left corner of the door and move it parallel
to the floor line. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;When a green dotted line appears press and hold the [Shift]
key. The line is an &lt;em&gt;inference&lt;/em&gt;

indicating the movement of object is parallel to the green axis.
Pressing [Shift] will lock the inference to limit to movement only
according to the inference. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;While keeping [Shift] key pressed. Point your mouse to the
corner point to use it as reference and left click to place the door at
a new temporary location. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select again one of the door corners and move it away from
the wall corner parallel to the green axis. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Without clicking the mouse button, type in [3] using the
keyboard. This will complete a measure box procedure to enter the
length of the movement by 3 cm from the origin (the wall corner). &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/div&gt;
    &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Adding the front bedroom door&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt; &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;p&gt;The
front bedroom is a mirror image of the rear bedroom door. Therefore, we
just need to place a door component into its designated location and
reverse its&amp;nbsp; opening. &lt;/p&gt;

    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Place another Quick-Door component using the
Components window and on wall and the floor line somewhere near the
rear bedroom door. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Click at the top left corner of the door and move it parallel
to the floor line (parallel with Green axis)
When the green inference line appears press and hold the [Shift] key. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt; While keeping [Shift] key pressed, point your mouse to the
corner point to use it as reference and left click to place the door
exactly at the room corner. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select again one of the door corners and move it away from
the wall corner parallel to the green axis.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Without
clicking the mouse button, type in [3] using the keyboard. This will
complete a measure box procedure to enter the length of the movement by
3 cm from the origin (the wall corner).&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Reversing Door Opening&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt; &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;p&gt;As you can see, the front bedroom door opening needs to be
reversed to be a right hand swing door. &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/813a2fbf.png" style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; width: 60%;" alt="FlipRed" align="right"&gt;

To reverse the door opening from right to left, we need to flip the
whole door using Context Menu -&amp;gt; Flip Along&amp;nbsp; -&amp;gt; Flip Along
Component’s Red.&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;/p&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Point your mouse the front bedroom door and activate Context
menu by pressing the right mouse button and the following pop-up menu
will appear. &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select Flip Along -&amp;gt; Components' Red and the whole door
component will be flipped so that the handle now is at the right
position.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuKamarTidur');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/AddDoor1.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="Room1Windows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Adding the
bedroom doors&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Placing the Rear Door&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The rear door is also 90cm wide. Since its location is adjacent to
the bedroom door, it has to open away from the inside (out swing door)
so both door leaves will not bump to each other. To do so, we need to
place the door component from the inside.
As usual, place a Quicky-door to a temporary location at the floor line
on the designated wall. Move the door to exactly at 3 cm away from a
wall corner. Just like in bedroom door placement, we need will use axis
inference, but this time we are going to use red axis inference. If
necessary, use &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuBelakang');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="PintuBelakang"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;

      &lt;tbody&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;b&gt;Tips
and Tricks&lt;/b&gt; &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;

          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt; &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;DC's
insertion point&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;

Normally,
a component will always have the same insertion point as the focus when
placing it into a model using the Component window. However, insertion
points of Dynamic Components behave differently. SketchUp will remember
the last point you previously selected to move a dynamic component and
use it at the new insertion point the next time you add the component
using Components window.&lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;/tbody&gt;
    &lt;/table&gt;
Move your view so that the interior side of the wall to the backyard
can be seen clearly.&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Open Components window and select Quickies folder. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select Quicky-Door and put the door component at the floor line
of the wall. &lt;br&gt;
If you previously moved a Quicky-door component using a point other
than the two lowest corners of the door component (see Tips and
Tricks), just place the new door anywhere on the wall and follow this
procedure:
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Click at the left bottom corner of the door component.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the door component to the corner of the wall and the
floor line.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Left click to place the door component at the temporary
location.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the door so it is 3 cm away from the wall corner using
similar steps when placing the two bedroom doors. Only this time we
will use the red axis inference.&lt;br&gt;

    &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuBelakang');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;

&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/AddDoor2.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Placing the
rear living room door.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Adding the bathroom door.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The structural width of the bathroom door is 80 cm (or 70 wide door
leaf). Customary, the bathroom door is an in-swing door. This is a
rather small bathroom. Therefore placement of the door and the way it
opens is important so it will not bump with other objects in the
bathroom. The door is a right-hand swing door.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;After a Quicky door component is placed at a temporary location on
the designated wall, change its width to 70 cm using Component Options
window. Afterward, place to its final location which is exactly 3 cm
away from a wall corner and flip it using Context Menu - Flip Along
-&amp;gt; Component’s Red. If necessary, use &lt;em&gt;Select&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/e3988210.png" class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png" class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuKMandi');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="PintuKMandi"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the camera/view so the outer side of the bathroom wall where
the door is to be placed can be clearly seen. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Add Quicky-Door component using Components window and place it on
temporary place at the floor line of the bathroom wall. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Right-Click at the door component and select
Dynamic Component -&amp;gt; Component Options. Change its width into 80 cm
and click [Apply] to finish changing its dimension
(these steps are not included in the animation because they are beyond
the screen capture.&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the door so it is 3 cm away from the wall corner using
similar steps when placing the two bedroom doors. Remember to always
use axes inference so the movement is always accurate. &lt;br&gt;

If necessary, use step (3) of the rear door placement if the
insertion point&amp;nbsp; prohibits you from placing the door component at
the floor line. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Change the door opening using &lt;em&gt;Context Menu-Flip
Along-Component's Red&lt;/em&gt; just like we previously did to the front
bedroom door. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuKMandi');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/8f7eed43.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Adding the
bathroom door&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;

&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Placing the Front Door&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The front door is the main door so it will have a bigger width of
100 cm. Since the door is in-swing door, we need to place it from the
outside of the house. However, after the door is placed at a temporary
location at the front wall, we need to change our view/camera
(orbiting) so the wall is viewed from the inside. We need to change
this view because we want to place the door right at the floor line,
which can not be seen from the outside.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;As usual, after placing the door component at a temporary location,
we will move it to so it there will a 3 cm space between the door and
the wall corner.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuDepan');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;

&lt;div style="display: none;" id="PintuDepan"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Placing and sizing the front door&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/h5&gt;

    &lt;h5&gt; &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;p&gt;The front door is left swing door and has 100 cm structural wide
    &lt;/p&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the camera so the front wall of the house can be clearly
seen from the outside.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Add a Quicky-Door component using &lt;em&gt;Components&lt;/em&gt; window
and place it anywhere on the living room wall.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Change the door structural opening width into 100 cm using
the &lt;em&gt;Component Options window&lt;/em&gt;. (This step is also not captured
during the animation).&lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Changing view/camera position.&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
      &lt;tbody&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;

          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;

          &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;Moving the camera/view
without pressing any tool.&lt;br&gt;

          &lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;Previously we use the &lt;em&gt;Orbit &lt;/em&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/cdf5e301.png" class="tools" style="width: 23px;"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; to change camera
position.
Instead of moving the camera, We can also change the view by panning
the model using the &lt;em&gt;Pan &lt;/em&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/2f88e868.png" class="tools" style="width: 23px;" alt="Pan"&gt;&lt;em&gt; tool &lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;

This tool can be activated by simultaneously pressing/holding mouse &lt;em&gt;middle-button&lt;/em&gt;
and &lt;em&gt;[Shift]&lt;/em&gt;
key. Move the mouse until desired view is achieved. When the mouse
button is released, you will be back to whatever tool you previously
selected &lt;br&gt;

          &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;/tbody&gt;

    &lt;/table&gt;
To make the door
component an in-swing door, we need to place it from the outside. To
move the door component to its designated position, we need to use the
floor line and a wall corner as references. At this point, the floor
line is hidden behind the front wall so the camera must be moved so it
will view the wall from the inside.&lt;br&gt;
See Tips and Tricks on how to move your camera/view.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;

    &lt;h5&gt;Placing the door to its designated location&lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt; &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;After moving the camera, click at bottom left corner of the
door component and move it to left wall corner. &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Click at the top left corner of the door and move it parallel
to the floor line.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Without
clicking the mouse button, type in [3] using the keyboard. This will
complete a measure box procedure to enter the length of the movement by
3 cm from the origin (the wall corner).&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('PintuDepan');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/e028b286.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;Placing
the main door&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Door Opening&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;At this point, all doors have been placed at their designated
locations. Notice that each door will automatically create an opening
on the wall. This is the Cut Opening feature of a SketchUp component.
The opening will also move when the component is moved.
However, SketchUp components can only make automatic opening only on
one face.
Since the Quicky Door component has opening animation, when we click
each door to animate door opening, we will see that the other side of
the wall still exists. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a4d42947.png" style="margin-top: 0.5em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em;" alt="DynaTools" align="left"&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Tool&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/d56a8132.png" class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;Interact&lt;/em&gt;
from the Dynamic Component toolbar and click at the front and read
bedroom door. Since the dynamic components has animation feature, the
doors will open by 45° (half of maximum door opening we set earlier) &lt;br&gt;
Notice that after each opening, the other side of the wall still
blocking the door entrance, especially when they are viewed from
inside the room as seen on the following animation. Repeat the process
so all doors are open &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/1efd9e96.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Bedroom
doors opening animation&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Creating wall opening manually.&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To have more realistic model of the house, we need to manually
create an opening for each of the door. Creating opening in SketchUp is
a straight forward process. Just make a rectangle the same size with
the door and push it as deep as wall thickness and voila … a hole is
created.&lt;br&gt;
However, since manually created opening will not move when the
component is moved, you have to also move it manually when you move the
component.

&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
Make a rectangle the same size with the door structural opening using &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" class="tools" alt="ToolRect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. Then, push the inner side of
the rectangle using &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png" class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. To ensure opening, use the
other side of the wall as reference when pushing the rectangle.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('ManualWallCut');" title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png" style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;

&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="ManualWallCut"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Move the camera so the front bedroom door can be clearly be
clearly seen from the inside. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Rectangle Tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at top left corner of
the door component and click again at the bottom right corner of the
door to create a rectangle exactly the same size with the door
component. &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Push and Pull Tool&lt;/em&gt; and click within the
rectangle/door and push it to wall thickness. We don’t need to use
measurement box to make 15 cm deep push, just point the mouse to and
click at the top edge of the opposite side of the wall as illustrated
in the animation. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;
    &lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
      &lt;tbody&gt;
        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;

        &lt;tr&gt;
          &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Healing&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
When we remove a line that divides two coplanar faces, the faces will
automatically “heal” into one face. &lt;br&gt;
          &lt;/td&gt;
        &lt;/tr&gt;
      &lt;/tbody&gt;
    &lt;/table&gt;
After
an opening is made, a line between the room and the living room wall
still exist. We want the rooms to have the same flooring style, so we
need to remove this line so all floor are within the one polygon.
Select &lt;em&gt;Erase&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png" class="tools" alt="ToolRect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the redundant line
so the bedroom floor and the living room floor now will be merged into
one polygon. &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Repeat all the above steps to every other door in the model so
all door will have a nice wall opening.&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('ManualWallCut');" title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;" alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 80%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/c80df51e.gif" style="width: 100%;" alt="RearWindows" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Manually
Create Wall Opening&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;Lesson Learned ....&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table id="customers"&gt;
  &lt;tbody&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;th style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;No&lt;/th&gt;
      &lt;th style="width: 445px;"&gt;Topics&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/th&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;

      &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using Quicky-Door dynamic component and
modifying its options to add doors to modify it to our specification's.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;2&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Moving a new placed component to
its designated position using component insertion points.&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;3&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Selecting an object using &lt;em&gt;Auto
select&lt;/em&gt; or by using &lt;em&gt;Select tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;move/Copy tool&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Moving an object by a specific length
using the &lt;em&gt;Measurement Box&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;5&lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;Flipping
an object to be its mirror image by flipping it around a specific axis
using &lt;em&gt;Flip along ...&lt;/em&gt; command.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;6&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Understanding insertion point
behavior in Dynamic Components.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;7&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;changing camera/view without
clicking the Orbit tool or the&amp;nbsp; Pan tool.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;8&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Using Interact tool to animate
the animation feature of a Dynamic Component.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;9&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Manually creating a hole/wall
opening using &lt;em&gt;Rectangle Tool&lt;/em&gt; and &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull Tool.&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;10&lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;To heal two coplanar faces into
one by erasing a dividing line between the two faces&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/1738c126.png" alt="Teras" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 45%;" align="left"&gt;This is the image of the 3-D model we have created
so far. The next chapter will adding windows to this model.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;em&gt;Enjoy&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-2648684249739048066?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/0Stz7MgxW7LlznFu8qcOE2FiY-8/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/0Stz7MgxW7LlznFu8qcOE2FiY-8/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/0Stz7MgxW7LlznFu8qcOE2FiY-8/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/0Stz7MgxW7LlznFu8qcOE2FiY-8/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/QuN0pPQh9yw" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/2648684249739048066/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=2648684249739048066&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/2648684249739048066?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/2648684249739048066?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/QuN0pPQh9yw/adding-doors-to-our-3d-model.html" title="Adding Doors to Our 3D Model" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_StepDetil.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/02/adding-doors-to-our-3d-model.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;D0ICRH0-fSp7ImA9Wx9TFEw.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-6130183144702521271</id><published>2010-01-25T15:18:00.005+07:00</published><updated>2010-11-22T15:46:05.355+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-11-22T15:46:05.355+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Project I" /><title>Making Walls and Floors</title><content type="html">&lt;div style="color: rgb(127, 96, 0);"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;.. a sweet little home ..&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;One who wants to start making a 3d model of a house using
SketchUp often feels
discouraged when she/he realizes that there is no special tool to make
wall. Everything must be made from scratch. Knowing that there are so
many walls to build make some people get the idea that SketchUp is
probably not the right tool to create 3D models of a house. This
following tutorial
will show you how easy it is to make wall and floor.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;These are the steps I normally do to make walls and floors in Google
SketchUp:&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Draw all room boundaries based on a floor plan so that each room
is represented by one (or more) rectangle(s).&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Transform each rectangle into a 3 dimensional block by pulling
its face to a height that consists of the wall height and the floor
raise. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Draw outlines on top of each block separating the floor line and
half of the wall thickness.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Push the inner section of each floor outline according to wall
height. The outer section will be the wall.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Remove any excess line on top of the wall and fix some of the
walls to
have the same thickness.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Create a Local Component Collection&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;As previously discussed in &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html"
target="_blank"&gt;&lt;em&gt;Freebies:
Quickies Anyone?&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
, we are going to use a dynamic component to help us draw a floor plan.
As suggested in the posting, all the Quicky components are to be saved
in Quickies sub folder. Since we are going use the folder quite
frequently, we need to set the folder as &lt;em&gt;Favorites&lt;/em&gt;.
Therefore, we don’t always have to find the physical folder every time
we want to use one of the Quickies.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To add sub folder Quickies as Favorites, select menu &lt;em&gt;Window&lt;/em&gt;
-&amp;gt; &lt;em&gt;Component&lt;/em&gt; to open the&lt;em&gt; Components window&lt;/em&gt;. From
there, click on the Details &lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/147d6bcf.png"
class="tools" style="width: 21px;" alt="Detail"&gt; button and select
“Open or create local collection component” and find Quickies sub
folder
in your local hard disk. &lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/c062b0ea.png"
style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: -150px; width: 70%;"
alt="Favorites" align="left"&gt;
Once the folder is opened, click once again at the Detail and select
“Add to Favorites”. From now on, Quickies folder will appear in one the
favorites and can be accessed without having to open the physical
folder.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Creating a new SketchUp file&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;SKP and SKB &lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
SketchUp puts all the elements of a model (material, components) in one
single file with SKP file extension. &lt;br&gt;
SketchUp by default will also create a backup file with SKB extension.
To open this backup file you need to rename its extension back to SKP.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Whenever SketchUp application is opened, it will automatically open
a new empty file &lt;strong&gt;Untitled.skp&lt;/strong&gt;. Environment setting of
the new file will be based on the &lt;em&gt;default template&lt;/em&gt; you
previously selected. To intentionally create new file, select menu &lt;em&gt;File
-&amp;gt; New&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Creating a floor Plan&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;We can draw a complete floor plan using &lt;em&gt;Line&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolLine"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; or &lt;em&gt;Rectangle&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolRect"&gt; &lt;em&gt;tool. &lt;/em&gt;In
fact, theoretically, you can draw anything in SketchUp using only the
line tool. However, lines (or entities) stick to other lines when
connected. So, moving one entity might move or alter the another line.
This will mess the floor plan. Not a good way to start
modeling. For that reason, in this tutorial I will use Quicky-Rectangle
components to make room boundaries.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/cae14a49.png"
title="Click for larger image"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; width: 20%;"
alt="BathDetil" align="right"&gt;Each
room will be represented by a Quicky-Rectangle. Rooms that are not
completely rectangle will be made from several rectangles. Excess lines
can be removed later. We will edit the rooms to their actual shapes
prior to making walls.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Notice that in the following example, the floor plan consists of
five rectangles within one big rectangle that represents the boundary
of the entire land. To draw the floor plan in SketchUp, we will put a
Quicky-Rectangle with the size of the land lot, then add five more
Quicky
rectangles, each sized to the exact dimension of each room. Once the
floor plan is completed, these components will exploded to convert them
to lines and faces&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('PlaceRectangles');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="PlaceRectangles"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Draw the land area (7×13 m). &lt;br&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The land area is represented by one Quicky-Rectangle..&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/Options-LandArea.png"
style="margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="RectSize"
align="right"&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Open Components window (menu Window -&amp;gt; Component) and
select
Favorite: Quickies.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click at Quicky-Rectangle component. Place it at Origin
(intersection point of the three main axes) and press Left Click to
place the component.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Open &lt;em&gt;Component Options&lt;/em&gt; window by right-clicking the
component and select &lt;em&gt;Dynamic Components - Component Option&lt;/em&gt;.
Change the width and height to the size of the land as shown in the
image. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Draw a rectangle for the front bedroom. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;div&gt;To ensure that the front bedroom is exactly 5m away from South
border line, we need to add a guide (construction line.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at any point at the
border line. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Move the cursor parallel to the red axis and type in [500]
and press Enter to create a guide 500 cm away from the border line. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Place another Quicky-Rectangle at intersection between the
guide and the red axis. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Change the component measurement to 300x300 using the
Component Options window.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Draw a rectangle for the rear bedroom.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Since the rear bedroom is located adjacent to the front room,
we can use it as a reference to place a Quicky-Rectangle.
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Place another Quicky-Rectangle at the top left corner of the
front bedroom rectangle.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Change the component measurement to 300x250 cm using the
Component Options window.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Adding a rectangle to make the living room.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The living room is also located adjacent to the front room, we
can use it as a reference to place a Quicky-Rectangle.
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Place another Quicky-Rectangle at the bottom right corner of
the front bedroom rectangle.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Change the component measurement to 400x450 cm using the
Component Options window.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating a rectangle for the bathroom.
&lt;div&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/49d8bee3.png"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" alt="ToolbarAccuracy"
align="right"&gt;Since
the bathroom is located at the top right corner the living room
rectangle and initially the&amp;nbsp; Quicky-rectangle insertion point is
at
its bottom
left corner, we need to place it at a temporary location. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Place a Quicky-Rectangle at a temporary location.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Change the component measurement to 150x175 cm using.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Move/Copy&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/11b7b4da.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolMove"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click at the top right
corner of the new rectangle and place it at the top right corner the
living room rectangle.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Erase the guide by clicking it using &lt;em&gt;Erase&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolRect"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Explode all Quicky-Rectangle components.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/43640a63.gif"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 35%;"
alt="Explode" align="right"&gt;Previously, we use Quicky-Rectangle to
avoid
lines sticking to each other
so resizing of rectangles is not easy to do. In SketchUp almost all 3d
shapes are created and edited using the push and pull tool and the push
and pull techniques. It will be easier to push/pull if faces are
connected to each other. Hence, we are going to explode each component
into mere edges and faces.
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select all the rectangles&amp;nbsp; using menu Edit -&amp;gt; Select
All.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Right click on any of the selected rectangles to activate the
context menu and select Explode (see picture).&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('PlaceRectangles');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;"
alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="margin: 1em auto; background-color: white; text-align: left;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/6d19a357.gif"
style="width: 430px;" alt="Rectangles" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating the
Floor Plan&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Making Walls and Floors&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;o:p&gt;&lt;/o:p&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Push/Pull Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"
style="margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolLine"
align="right"&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Most
3D shapes in SketchUp are created and edited using Push/Pull tool. Any
flat face can be pulled and pushed to make or to change its 3d shapes
in the direction perpendicular to the face. For a 2d shape, a new face
identical to the selected face will be added and its outline will make
the 3d object thickness&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Since floor shapes exactly like wall (minus wall thickness), we will
create both wall and floor within a single procedure. In general, the
easies way to tinker with SketchUp objects is in its 3-D form.
Therefore, once the two dimensional floor plan is completed, we will
convert each rectangle into 3 dimensional block simply by puling its
face to a height.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; Push/pull technique is a patented technology owned by SketchUp.
With this technique (re)shaping objects is almost like dealing with
real physical objects than can be pulled and pushed, but without
physical barriers.
Application of push/pull techniques is done using &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool &lt;/em&gt; included in the &lt;em&gt;Edit&lt;/em&gt;
Toolbar.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;All wall have the same height, which is 285 cm above floor surface.
And all floor is raised by 50 cm from road level. For this purpose we
will change each room 2d shape into its 3d shape by selecting its face
and pulling it by 335 cm using the Push/Pull tool.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('DindingLantai');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="DindingLantai"&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 4.5em;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Measurement Box&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Dimension of object we are creating will be automatically displayed in
the Measurement Box. During creation of a rectangle, Measurement Box
will display the rectangle’s length and width in relation with your
mouse gesture. &lt;br&gt;
But the main function of the measurement box is to accept parameter(s)
from keyboard in order to create objects to specific dimensions
therefore produce accuracy (See: &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/improving-model-accurary.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Improving Accuracy&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and click on the front
bedroom rectangle. Move the mouse upward and it begins to create a 3
dimensional shape. Without clicking the mouse, type [335] from the
keyboard and press [enter]. You just enter the height of room
accurately using the &lt;em&gt;Measurement box&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Since all other rooms also have the same wall and floor height,
we can just repeat this operation to the rest of the rectangles by
double clicking on each of the face. (Except for the front and rear
backyard, we will deal with this later.)&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('DindingLantai');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;"
alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;span style="" lang="FI"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;table
style="margin: 1em auto; background-color: white; text-align: left; width: 350px;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/8fe147d2.gif"
style="width: 344px;" alt="PushPull" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Making 3d
shape of rooms with the right height&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Now you have your first 3-D model, as easy as "pull it here and put
it there".&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Preparing Outlines for Wall Thickness&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Room dimensions and
wall thickness&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Room Dimensional is always measured from the midpoint of each wall.
With 15 cm thick wall, a 3m wide room will have a net width of 285 cm. &lt;br&gt;
(excluding the wall).&lt;br&gt;
Room that sided with land boundary, will be measured from its outer
side of the wall. Therefore, the same 3m wide room will have a 277.5cm
net width if one of its is on the land boundary.&lt;span
style="color: blue;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt; The 3-d shapes we created has formed room height and boundaries. Of
course the real boundary should be walls with some thickness. The next
procedure is to create inner outline that reflect thickness of the wall.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In this design, all walls are 15 cm thick. Convention used for room
dimension that it is measured from the middle of each wall as shown in
the Tip &amp;amp; Trick. Therefore we need to create floor outlines at
exactly 7.5 cm away from each room boundary. Wall side that is not
adjacent to another room will only have half of the required thickness,
we will fix this later.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/69c81a82.png"
style="margin-top: 0.1em; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-right: 1.5em; width: 20%;"
alt="PushTool" align="left"&gt;Floor outlines are drawn using the &lt;em&gt;Offset
&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/d5cfe940.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; in the Edit toolbar.
Using this tool, we will create another polygon within on top of each
room with the same contour and at a certain distance from the parent
edges to represent half of the wall thickness. Some room boundaries
will two set of this wall lines while other will only have one.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('GarisDinding');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="GarisDinding"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Offset Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/d5cfe940.png"
style="margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolLine"
align="right"&gt;Offset tool is used to create copies of lines and faces
at a uniform distance from the originals. You can offset edges of faces
either inside or outside (outline) of the original face. The distance
of the offset can be set directly using the measurement box to the
direction of the mouse movement (inward or outward). &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Select the Offset tool and click at one of the top edge of front room
and move the mouse inward. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Without clicking any mouse button, type [7.5] using the
keyboard. This will make copies off all the edges 7.5 cm from the
originals. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; To repeat the same operation to all other top faces, double
click on each the face and copies of the edges will be created at
exactly 7,5 cm and all floor outlines will be formed. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink" href="javascript:toggleLayer('GarisDinding');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;"
alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 100%; background-color: white; text-align: left;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/63989266.gif"
style="width: 100%;" alt="OffSettingWallLine" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating
floor and wall outlines&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Notice in the above animation that walls that are not adjacent to
another room has only 7.5 cm thick. We'll fix this later.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;Creating Wall and Floor&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Undo the last 100
operations.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Do not worry of mishap. Because you can always undo everything as far
with Undo (Ctrl-Z). The number of possible sequential Undo commands is
limited to 100 steps or to the last time you saved your model (which
ever is later) &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;If you have already guessed that the next step is pushing the inner
area of each room to make floor and the wall height then you are 100%
correct.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;If you also have predicted that the tool to use is the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; then it's time for you to
replace me writing this tutorial. To create the floor, we'll push inner
part of each room top face 285 cm deep. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('DindingDanLantai');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="DindingDanLantai"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select the Push/Pull tool and click at the inner top face of the
front bedroom. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Push the face downward and without clicking the mouse, type 285
using your keyboard and press [Enter]. This operation will create
cavity on the face 285 cm deep. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; To repeat the same operation to other floor outline, double
click on each of the inner top face so all room will have wall and
floor elements.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;After all walls and floors are created, it is time we remove some
redundant lines by clicking the lines using the &lt;em&gt; Eraser &lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/dc054b50.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.
Do not worry of unintentional deletion because you can always undo to
correct any mistake you make. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('DindingDanLantai');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;"
alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="width: 100%; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; background-color: white; text-align: left;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 480px;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/30b0ab31.gif"
style="width: 100%;" alt="PushFloor" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Create
Rooms' Wall and Floor&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Correcting Wall thickness&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/cdf5e301.png"
style="margin-top: 0.25em; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 0.5em; width: 25px;"
alt="Orbit" align="right"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Orbiting your model
without pressing a tool button&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Orbit Tool is used to rotate the camera (your view) about the model.
Using orbit tool, the object will stay at its position but you view it
from different angle. This tool can be activated at any time without
using the tool button by pressing middle mouse button while moving your
mouse to a desired position. When the button is released, you will
return to the previous command without any interception whatsoever &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The above animation indicates that some walls are only half thick.
Once again we will use the &lt;em&gt;Push/Pull&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/ba2799b8.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolPush"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; to pull some faces by 7.5
cm and repeat the operation by double-clicking on all faces that
require thickening.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt; For walls that are bordering with land boundary, the 7.5 cm pull
will be done inward toward the room. Others will done outward.
Therefore all walls will have 15 cm thickness.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;View of some wall faces are blocked by other wall. You need to move
your camera (your view that is} using &lt;em&gt;Orbit&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/cdf5e301.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt;&lt;em&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt; and continue double
clicking until all wall have the required thickness.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: right;"&gt;&lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('KetebalanDinding');"
title="Lihat langkah detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/StepDetil.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; width: 300px; height: 19px;" alt="StepDetil"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style="display: none;" id="KetebalanDinding"&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Select Push/Pull tool and click on eastern inner wall of the
living room. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Immediately move the mouse inward and type in 7.5 from the
keyboard and press enter. This operation will add 7.5 cm so the wall
will be 15cm thick. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;To repeat the same operation, double click on the other wall
areas that require thickening. &lt;a class="umpetanLink"
href="javascript:toggleLayer('KetebalanDinding');"
title="Click to Close Detail"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/a1dea69e.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em; width: 17px; height: 17px;"
alt="ButtonX" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;table
style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; background-color: white; text-align: left; width: 100%;"
border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/41855813.gif"
style="width: 100%;" alt="PullingWall" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Fixing All
Wall to Required Thickness&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Saving Your SketchUp File to Local Disk&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To ensure that your modeling work is not lost, save your work by
clicking &lt;em&gt;Save&lt;/em&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/8cd1527a.png"
class="tools" alt="ToolSelect"&gt; tool.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
Select previously created "Sketch" sub folder and set filename into
"House Project I" and press enter.
By default, SketchUp automatically creates a backup file (.skb). But
it's good practice if you often press the save tool for save keeping&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;We have Accomplished ....&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;table id="customers"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;th style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;No&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;th style="width: 445px;"&gt;T o p i c s&lt;/th&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;1&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Creating a folder that contains
SketchUp
components to always appear as one of Favorites / in the Components
window.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;2&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Starting SketchUp from scratch
by creating a new SketchUp (.skp) file. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;3&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using and entering parameters of
Quicky-Rectangle component to make floor plans in a quick, flexible and
accurate manner. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;4&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;Adding
Guides (construction lines) using Tape Measure tool to accurate put an
object at its. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;5&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Moving object to its designated
position using the Move Tool &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;6&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Removing redundant lines using
the Erase tool &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;7&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Exploding components/groups to
their basic elements using Context-Menu -&amp;gt; Explode &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;8&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using Push/Pull tool to transform a
2-dimensional object into 3-dimensional.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;9&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Entering objects’ parameters using the
keyboard to create objects with accurate dimensions (Measurement Box) &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;10&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Redoing the same operation to another
object using mouse Double Click. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;11&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using Offset tool to create copies of
edges with a uniform distance from all sides of the original.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center; width: 63px;"&gt;12&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="width: 445px;"&gt;Using Push/Pull tool to add volume to
or subtract volume by moving the face an object. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;13&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Using Orbit tool to change the
camera position/ view without pressing the designated tool.&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;14&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Canceling operation by pressing
Undo (menu Edit -&amp;gt; Undo, or [Ctrl-Z]). &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr class="alt"&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: middle; text-align: center;"&gt;15&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;Storing / Naming the model using
the Save Tool &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/5c0b9aeb.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 35%;"
alt="Teras" align="left"&gt; Congratulations, now you have accurately
created a 3-dimensional model of a house. I will soon post the next
chapter: Adding doors.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Enjoy&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-6130183144702521271?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Rv7H8q8Mq3vXRpnwLbZ5GuqRnGE/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Rv7H8q8Mq3vXRpnwLbZ5GuqRnGE/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Rv7H8q8Mq3vXRpnwLbZ5GuqRnGE/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Rv7H8q8Mq3vXRpnwLbZ5GuqRnGE/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/8mxmMXdlStE" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/6130183144702521271/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=6130183144702521271&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6130183144702521271?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/6130183144702521271?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/8mxmMXdlStE/making-walls-and-floors.html" title="Making Walls and Floors" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_StepDetil.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/making-walls-and-floors.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;CU8HQ3s-eCp7ImA9WxBWE08.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-5217249325676775953</id><published>2010-01-21T20:11:00.004+07:00</published><updated>2010-02-05T05:50:32.550+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-02-05T05:50:32.550+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Freebies" /><title>Quickies Anyone?</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Quicky Components&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;To speed up the house modeling, I provide a half-dozen dynamic
components for you to download from Google 3d Warehouse. These
component have predefined
options that can be modified so they are reusable to the degree that
you will only require one of these components for every application (
for example for all the windows of your house, even when each has
different shape and size). &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/WindowDoor.png" alt="Door Window" style="border-width: 0px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1.5em; width: 60%;" align="left"&gt;
&lt;p&gt;There are three Quickies components used during Project One
modeling:
A Rectangle, a Door and a Window components. Three more Quickies will
be
available before we start Project Two Modeling: A Sliding door, A
Straight/U-shape stair and a Spiral Stair components.
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;I will discuss where and how to download the three Quickies at the
bottom of this posting.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;For
now, I believe the six components will cover our need for quick and
accurate modeling. Give me a shout if you think some other kind of
dynamic components are also essential. (Just a teaser, I'll throw in a
by-fold door Dynamic Component later during the Project Two modeling).&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;table style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 10px; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;b&gt;Dynamic Components&lt;/b&gt; &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/e0acdb49.png" style="width: 30px; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 1.6em;" alt="ToolLine" align="right"&gt;Unlike its predecessor , &lt;br&gt;
a Dynamic Component (DC) can accept entries from users to modify
predefined options to control some of its elements.&lt;br&gt;
A DC may also has some logic as to what each defined component element
would behave when it is clicked and/or resized. &lt;br&gt;

      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;

&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;p&gt;I made all these component to help quickly find the right dimension
of&amp;nbsp; windows and doors while keeping all element in the right
proportion. If we do this in the simplest way possible, we can
concentrate more on other modeling/designing aspect.&amp;nbsp; For
instance, you may want to resize a
window overall dimension to fit to an existing wall. Just like in the
real word, the resizing must not effect the dimension of the sashes or
the jambs except for their length to accommodate the new overall window
size. For such reason, the door and window components are detailed in
dimension down
to rabbet depth but are missing all ornamental details such as raised
panel.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;If so required, after you are comfortable with the doors/windows
dimensions, you can to replace them with more detailed components.&lt;br&gt;
However, these dynamic components is "technical
drawing ready" for you to give to window/door manufacturers. You can
also edit the components, but if you edit it using SketchUp free, you
will loose their dynamic feature since Dynamic Components can only be
edited using SketchUp Pro.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h5&gt;Measurement Unit&lt;/h5&gt;



&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;By
default, the measurement unit used is in Centimeter. You can enter
as many
decimals as required. You can also enter units other
than Centimeters, as along as the entry is followed by appropriate
notation,
such
as [3.5"] or [39.15m]. It will be automatically converted into
centimeter. Any of the measurements can be modified anytime you please.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;



&lt;h5&gt;Animation&lt;/h5&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The window and door components have opening /
closing animation capability. So far, nothing technical about this
feature, but it is fun to watch.&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h5&gt;Scaling / Change the
size of the public&lt;/h5&gt;



&lt;table style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 10px; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-bottom: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;b&gt;Reversing Door Opening&lt;/b&gt; &lt;br&gt;
A
single leaf door component will have right hand opening. To make it
left hand opening you can ether flip the component by activating the
Context Menu (Right Mouse Click)
and choose Flip Along - Component's Red. &lt;br&gt;
or you can use Scale to and drag on side of to the door across to
another side. &lt;br&gt;
The first approach is favorable if dimensions are already set to the
door.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;



&lt;p&gt;Each
of the components has its width and length setting to accurately size
the model. In addition, the size of these &lt;br&gt;
components can also be
modified using the &lt;em&gt;Scale&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png" alt="ToolSelect" class="tools"&gt;tool&lt;/em&gt;.
Changes to the components using this tool will modify the overall
length
and width of the components but will not effect all other dimensions
that
are not directly related to the overall size. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;More on Scale tool is discussed in: &lt;a href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/improving-model-accurary.html"&gt;Improving
Accuracy&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Scale tool can also be used to reverse opening of a single leaf door
(see Tip and Trick above)&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h4&gt;Quicky Rectangles (1)&lt;/h4&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The first Quicky component probably is the simplest dynamic
component
ever made by human. However, I find this component useful when helping
SketchUp beginners to create floors plan because I can skip
some SketchUp concept in order not to overload with theories and
go straight into modeling. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=1bd5a257d5dc417b5eebb6f645c85313" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Options-Rectangle.png" alt="TraditionalBath" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 45%;" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;This simple component is mainly used to make a rough
floor plan
quickly and
accurately. Based on this rough floor plan, a refined floor plan is
made
and the walls and the floor of the building are created.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Normally, one room will be represented by one Quick Rectangle. You
may need to use more than one Quicky Rectangle if some of the rooms
have irregular shapes. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;During usage, you will set the component option (width and
length) according to room dimensions. You can also resize the rectangle
using scale tool and drag from one its sides. However, I suggest that
you use another object as a reference to ensure accuracy.&lt;/p&gt;



&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/DraftFloorPlaneng.png" alt="Floor Plan" style="border-width: 0px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; width: 35%;" align="left"&gt;After
all the rooms are represented, these components will be exploded into
lines and rectangles and will disappear from the model (more on this
will be discussed later). Prior to making the wall, some wall outlines
may require editing, such adding sloping lines and curves to shape
exactly like the actual floor plan.&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The figure shows Quick-nine
Rectangles that are arranged into one floor plan. Dimensions of each
room are
added for clarity.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h4&gt;&lt;a name="Quicky-Door"&gt;Quicky Door (2)&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h4&gt;&lt;p&gt;This component can be used to accurately model a single or double
leaf door with opening/closing animation.&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/DoorDetail.png" alt="Door Detail" style="border-width: 0px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: -1em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 50%;" align="right"&gt;The structural opening will define the overall dimension
of the door.&lt;br&gt;
Change
to the height (&lt;strong&gt;a&lt;/strong&gt;) or
width (&lt;strong&gt;b&lt;/strong&gt;) of this component can also be done using
Scale Tool. While
other settings, such as Jamb/Head's width (&lt;strong&gt;h&lt;/strong&gt;),
thickness (&lt;strong&gt;c&lt;/strong&gt;) and Rabbet
(&lt;strong&gt;g&lt;/strong&gt;) must be set using this Component Options window.
So are the leaf's
thickness (&lt;strong&gt;e&lt;/strong&gt;) and the width (&lt;strong&gt;f&lt;/strong&gt;) of
the second door leaf. Naturally,&amp;nbsp; with this
intended restriction, scaling the overall door dimension will not
change other dimension proportionally as it would happen if this
component were not a dynamic component.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;span style="font-family: Georgia;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=7d8f2abfc037ad985eebb6f645c85313" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Options-Door.png" alt="TraditionalBath" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-right: 0.75em; width: 45%;" align="left"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;p&gt;As you can see, the width of the first door leaf is not editable
since it will be automatically calculated based on the overall
dimension, some other settings.
So if you want to have both leaves have equal width, you need to find
the net width when there is no second leaf. Divide the number by two
and enter the result as the '2nd Door Net Width' value.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Without any apparent reason, I&amp;nbsp; set the degree of the second
door opening - when animated - as half of the first door maximum
opening value.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;

&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 90%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Example-Doors.jpg" style="width: 100%;" alt="Doors" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Quicky Door
Examples&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;br&gt;&lt;h4&gt;&lt;a name="Quicky-Window"&gt;Quicky Window (3)&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h4&gt;&lt;p&gt;I try to make this component as a "one for all dynamic component"
that it can be 'stiched' to make different shapes of window
design. &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=518380847770a0a75eebb6f645c85313" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Options-Window.png" alt="Window Options" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 0.75em; width: 45%;" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; This may not be completely achieved, but they
surely are flexible enough
to appear as different set of windows as illustrated in the example.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Options available of this
component are almost similar to that of&amp;nbsp; a Quick-door. One
important
difference is that in Quick window we can hide one side of the jamb so
there will only be three sides of the jamb.&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Side
A&lt;/i&gt; is the side where
the hinges&amp;nbsp; reside. Side B, C and D are all other sides clock wise.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;We need to hide one side of the jamb if we want to attach this
window component to another window or door component. So the merged
component will look like one &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;We can rotate each Quick window so the hinged side can be anywhere
else other than upper side of the jamb.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;br&gt;


&lt;table style="margin-top: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; width: 90%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/Example-Window.jpg" style="width: 100%;" alt="Window" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Quicky
Window Examples&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;

&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;h4&gt;Downloading the Components&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/h4&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The three components are ready to download from the Google 3d-
Warehouse. There are two alternative in how to download the component:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Visit the Google warehouse&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Add directly to your model using the Window Components&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;


&lt;p&gt;To visit the Google ware house, just click each of the Component
Option for each of the component and it will open the respective
component's page in the warehouse. Save each of the component to sub
folder \Quickies for easy access later.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;



&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/Quickies/c1d203b0.png" style="margin: 1em 1em 1em -3px; width: 40%;" alt="WarehouseDirect" align="left"&gt;We can also add each component directly to your model
using Window Components as if they were in your local folders as if they
were in your local folder. Since there are thousands of components
already in the warehouse. You need to enter a few unique keywords to filter
your search. &lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Open menu Window -&amp;gt; Components and type [harrynov DC]. Click the
Search button (the magnifying glass) to display all my DCs component.
Click to download a component and place it to your model.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 290px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;


  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Saving components
downloaded suing the Window components to your
local folder&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;Components
added directly to your model using the window components are stored
only in your model. To save them to your local folder we must go back
to the Components Window and click&amp;nbsp; the &lt;em&gt;In Model&lt;/em&gt; &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/6e0ce84a.png" style="margin: -1.6em 0.3em -1em; width: 20px;" alt="InModel" align="middle"&gt; button to display all components stored in the model.
Right Click at the component you want to save to activate a context
menu and choose&amp;nbsp; 'save as' to save it to your local folder.&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;p&gt;To avoid having to always download the same components over
and over again from the 3d warehouse, you should later save each of
these Quickies to a local folder. Save all the components to sub folder
\Quicky for later use.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;em&gt;&lt;/em&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;em&gt;Enjoy!&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;br&gt;



&lt;br&gt;


Harrynov
&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-5217249325676775953?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/gca1IxMRmfB02f2L8RV-YVVEUIk/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/gca1IxMRmfB02f2L8RV-YVVEUIk/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/gca1IxMRmfB02f2L8RV-YVVEUIk/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/gca1IxMRmfB02f2L8RV-YVVEUIk/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/bZVPl-n3K4U" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/5217249325676775953/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=5217249325676775953&amp;isPopup=true" title="5 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5217249325676775953?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5217249325676775953?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/bZVPl-n3K4U/quickies-anyone.html" title="Quickies Anyone?" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/th_e0acdb49.png" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>5</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/quickies-anyone.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;A0ANSHY9fSp7ImA9WxBVEkw.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-4601223053567859324</id><published>2010-01-19T08:03:00.003+07:00</published><updated>2010-02-15T14:43:19.865+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-02-15T14:43:19.865+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Preparation" /><title>The Projects</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;

&lt;table style="margin: 1em auto; text-align: left; width: 480px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%;" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;

  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(255, 204, 204);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Copyright Notice&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;The
scenario and designs discussed in the projects are based on a Question
and Answer that appears in Consultation Section of Indonesia's &lt;strong&gt;Tabloid Rumah Edition: 148/VI, November 2008.&lt;/strong&gt;
This reference is based on a high appreciation to the architect that
can provide with excellent solution in regard with restriction of
available land.&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;

&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In this tutorial, we will try to learn to use SketchUp to
step-by-step "build" a new house and later “renovate” the house. In
order to do so, we will separate the modeling into two projects: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;

  &lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Project I : Building a two bedroom house. &lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;div&gt;
&lt;table style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;

&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;

&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Kompas" style="margin-top: -1em; margin-bottom: 0.5em; width: 60%;" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/a4e1ef3a.png"&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
For layouting and editing purposes, it is assumed that the house is facing South. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;It is assumed that we are going to build the new house from square one:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Adding walls and floors.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Installing doors and windows.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Adding roof and ceiling.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Adding details and other ornaments. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Doing finishing work such as adding floor tiles, painting and a little landscaping. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;

    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;
    &lt;h5&gt;Project II : House Remodeling&lt;br&gt;
    &lt;/h5&gt;
    &lt;div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The remodeling job will include:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;ol type="a"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Adding another floor&lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Adding more room and renovate existing bedrooms.&lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Remodel the roofing.&lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Create a better façade.&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;
    &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Project I : A Little house in .........&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/Floor-Plan_Original.png.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/Floor-Plan_Original.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/FloorPlan_3D-English.png" title="Click for Detailed Floorplan" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; width: 40%;" alt="Denah" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/8e5de72b.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Phase1/8e5de72b.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;span class="caption" style="color: blue; font-size: 10px; font-family: Verdana,Sans-Serif; font-weight: normal; text-align: center;"&gt;

&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The initial model is a type 36 house on&amp;nbsp; 7×13m land with following details:&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Two bedrooms.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;A multipurpose room that includes living room, family room, dining room and a kitchen.&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;One bathroom.&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Front and rear terraces.&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;

&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Specifications and other details, such as the height of the walls
and floors, will be explained thoroughly when we model the
corresponding objects.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
Detailed floor plan of the building can be viewed by clicking the floor image.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/0a95e2c4.png" imageanchor="1" target="_blank" style="clear: right; float: right; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1em;"&gt;&lt;span class="caption" style="color: blue; font-size: 10px; font-family: Verdana,Sans-Serif; font-weight: normal; text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Project II : A Nice Compact House&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The remodeling / rooms addition are as follows: &lt;br&gt;

&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Another service door&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Living Room&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;One bedroom&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;One master bathroom&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;A Storage room&lt;/li&gt;

  &lt;li&gt;Kitchen Area&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;A small garden &lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;Laundry room/area&lt;/li&gt;
  &lt;li&gt;A staircase&lt;br&gt;
  &lt;/li&gt;

&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Solution given in the magazine is reflected in the following floor images.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;div class="separator" style="clear: both; text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/0daebfc2.png" onclick="window.open('http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/0daebfc2.png','popup','width=605,height=616,scrollbars=no,resizable=no,toolbar=no,directories=no,location=no,menubar=no,status=no,left=0,top=0'); return false"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/English-FloorPlan-3D.png" title="Click for Detailed Floorplan" style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 90%;" alt="Denah" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;

&amp;nbsp; &lt;br&gt;

&lt;a href="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/0a95e2c4.png" imageanchor="1" target="_blank" style="clear: right; float: right; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1em;"&gt;&lt;span class="caption" style="color: blue; font-size: 10px; font-family: Verdana,Sans-Serif; font-weight: normal; text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;p&gt; &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Apart from the dimensions given above, all shapes and dimension used
in the model are based solely on my humble interpretation to the
illustrations provided in the tabloid.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Here is a 360° visual image of&amp;nbsp; 3D model home after renovation.&lt;br&gt;
 &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;table style="margin: 1em auto; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;

  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/9ae06ebe.gif" alt="360degree" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;360°
view of the 3D model of the final Stage&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;

&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;I believe the design solution not only has been able to meet the
expectation of the requester but it also still allows some more rooms
addition on the second floor&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Futher modification and development&lt;br&gt;

&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;When the final 3-dimension model is completed, you can analyze the
position of the staircase since some of the stair treads and landing
are protruding into the front room.
You can study how it effects people sitting in the room and what
furniture to use in the area to compensate such stair shape. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;You could also consider removing the wall between the front room
with the living room and replacing it with some type of a divider to
maintain privacy. You can also experiment by replacing the u-shape
stair with a spiral stair and place it somewhere in the back.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Using SketchUp, everything can be done easily and analyzed thoroughly without having to place a single brick. &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br&gt;

&lt;br&gt;

&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-4601223053567859324?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/TL0jWLd9ArWBfvEsUXWNVkX_H-w/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/TL0jWLd9ArWBfvEsUXWNVkX_H-w/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/TL0jWLd9ArWBfvEsUXWNVkX_H-w/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/TL0jWLd9ArWBfvEsUXWNVkX_H-w/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/UO8oYLnyLys" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/4601223053567859324/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=4601223053567859324&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/4601223053567859324?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/4601223053567859324?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/UO8oYLnyLys/projects.html" title="The Projects" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/projects.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DUYDQXY8fCp7ImA9WxBQGEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-1387309523647359288</id><published>2010-01-19T05:32:00.001+07:00</published><updated>2010-01-19T09:12:50.874+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-01-19T09:12:50.874+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Preparation" /><title>A Fresh Start</title><content type="html">&lt;div style="color: rgb(76, 17, 48);"&gt;... New to SkecthUp ...   &lt;br&gt;&lt;/div&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;h4&gt;Installing Google SketchUp&lt;/h4&gt;


&lt;p&gt;There is no special settings required during SketchUp installation, simply
run&amp;nbsp; &lt;em&gt;GoogleSketchUpWEN.exe&lt;/em&gt; and follow all instructions on the
screen. Select installation folder as suggested by the
installation program. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Because Sketchup is a free program, you do not need to enter
any serial key number or to follow specific activation procedure. You are only
required to accept the term of use.&lt;/p&gt;




&lt;p&gt;&lt;em&gt;That's all there is to it&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h4&gt;Prepare the Working Folders&lt;/h4&gt;


&lt;table style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 1em; width: 160px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="1"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Preparation/efce5af0.jpg" style="height: 192px;" alt="Folder" align="middle"&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p&gt;You need to prepare a few folders to manage files created and downloaded during modeling with this tutorial (see in illustration)
&lt;br&gt;Folder "\Sketch" will be used for SketchUp (*. skp) files we create.
Sub-folders "\Components" will be used to store downloaded and created components, and Subfolders "\Quickies" will be used to store Quickies Components&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Detail in how to download and store all the component to their
corresponding folder will be provided at Freebies: Quickies and other Freebies postings. &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;h4&gt;Running SketchUp for the First Time&lt;/h4&gt;


&lt;p&gt;The first time you run Sketchup,&amp;nbsp; you must choose one of the
available templates. Templates are files that store various
settings of the modeling environment such as units of measurement and
screen style .&amp;nbsp; &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;table style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 0.5em; width: 210px; font-family: verdana; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; font-size: 65%;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;

    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Who is Sang &lt;/span&gt;

        &lt;br&gt;Sang
is the figure that appears when we start a new model. This 5'9 tall
"(175 cm) person can be used as a guide to position and determine the
size of the first object you create. You can delete Sang afterward. &lt;span style="color: blue;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Select "Simple Template-Meter"as the initial template (we will customize this later).
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Uncheck "Always show on start-up" at the pop-up&amp;nbsp; "Welcome To
SkecthUp"&amp;nbsp; screen in order to prevent it from reappearing.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;After clicking &lt;em&gt;[Start Using SketchUp]&lt;/em&gt; button, the followin screen&amp;nbsp; will appear. This is your
design desk.&amp;nbsp; A popup will also appear (Instructor) that briefly
describes some SketchUp concepts. Read on or you can immediately close
it because we will discuss the concept in lot more depth later on.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Sang02.png" style="margin-top: 1em; width: 100%; margin-bottom: 1.5em;" alt="sang" align="middle"&gt; 

&lt;p&gt;The above picture shows the three main elements of SketchUp that we will use intensively during a modeling:
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&amp;nbsp; Main Axes (Red, Blue and Green)
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&amp;nbsp; Toolbars, and
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&amp;nbsp; Measurement Box
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;


&lt;h5&gt;1. Main Axes&lt;/h5&gt;&lt;p&gt;Main axes are the three colored lines are used as a virtual axis of the
model we make. The position of the axes above are not related to the
building orientations. Generally, the modeling is almost always begins
with 0 point Axis, the crossing point of the three axes, and front side
of the model is facing towards us.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 1em; width: 210px; font-family: verdana; margin-left: 1.5em; font-size: 65%;" align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Main Axes Color Convention&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;

        &lt;p&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

        &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style="color: red;"&gt;Red Axis &lt;/span&gt; indicates X axis to display left and right of object &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

        &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style="color: rgb(0, 0, 254);"&gt;Blue Axis&lt;/span&gt; indicates Y axis&amp;nbsp; to display up and down &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

        &lt;ul&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style="color: lime;"&gt;Green Axis &lt;/span&gt; indicates Z axis to display front and rear of models. &lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
      &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p&gt;Setting the real orientation of a building is done by entering North Angle value, where as a value of 0 indicates the building is facing South and a value of 90 indicates the building is facing East. This is needed primarily to simulate the fall of the sun/shadows on the building. The simulation is accurate as per the minute of a certain date, as long as the building location is also provided. You can select one of the predefined location or you can enter specific Latitude and Longitude values manually with the help of Google Map or Google Earth or even a GPS. (More of this concept is discussed in General section)&lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h5&gt;2. Toolbars. &lt;/h5&gt;&lt;p&gt;Majority of our communication with SketchUp is done
through toolbars. By default SketchUp will display only the Getting Started
toolbar as shown in the above picture. There are many toolbars that can be
displayed.&amp;nbsp; Step by step, we will add more toolbars as needed. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;h5&gt;3. Measurement Box. &lt;/h5&gt;&lt;p&gt;One important aspect of modeling is the setting of dimensions of
whatever objects we are adding to our model. In SketchUp almost all dimension can be determined by means of clicking &amp;amp; dragging with the mouse and the result is shown
in the Measurement Box. In this way, modeling will be made
very quickly, but not necessarily accurate.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 1em; width: 210px; font-family: verdana; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 65%; margin-right: 1.5em;" align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;

&lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;

        &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Measurement Box&lt;/span&gt;

        &lt;br&gt;Measurement
box is used to display measurement(s) of object we are creating. For
example when we select Circle tool, the measurement box will display
the number of side/segments the circle will be constructed and
after&amp;nbsp; we click a position, it will display the radius of the
circle. &lt;br&gt;Measurement box main purpose is to set dimensions and
other parameter by keying the a number&amp;nbsp; to change the displayed
value. This will ensure accuracy of the model. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;p&gt;You can use Measurement Box to make object dimension and position
accurate by typing in the desided number(s)/length through the keyboard.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Unit used in Measurement Box is in agreement with the choice of
measurement units that you have set in Model Info. However, you
can enter any type of unit of measurement as long as you add
the appropriate notation. For example, if you want to make a circle to make 2.5-inch pipe, simply type in [2.5"] and press [Enter].
Automatically SketchUp will convert the measurement into whatever unit
you previously set. No need for any calculator to convert
measurements.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h4&gt;Setting the Model Environment Model&lt;/h4&gt;&lt;p&gt;Before we use SketchUp, we need to modify some settings, so that
everybody will have the same modelling environment setting in order to
obtain relatively similar input/output. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When we first run SketchUp, we chose one of Simple templates. We
need to make some adjustment before we move on with the modeling. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h5&gt;Changing Units and Dimensions&lt;/h5&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Unit of Measurement and Display Dimensions can be changed through Model info window that can be accessed via menu Window -&amp;gt; Model info. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/ModelInfo-Unit.gif" style="margin-top: 1em; width: 60%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em;" alt="Change Unit" align="right"&gt;Changing measurement units will not modify the dimension of the objects that are already in the model.&amp;nbsp; &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Change the settings of Units by changing the highlighted fields with values shown in the following figure. 
  &lt;br&gt;This
change is made in order to reduce the number of digits that must be
typed in when setting objects' dimension, and in order to the have a
neater display if we want to show dimensions of objects.&amp;nbsp; &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/ModelInfo-Dimension.gif" style="margin-top: 1em; width: 60%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em;" alt="Change Dimension" align="right"&gt;In
relation to that, we can change the look of the standard
dimensions of the "Align to Screen" (the numbers are always facing the
screen) to line with the objects measured. &lt;br&gt;With this appearance, dimensions are displayed neater and the 3d effects is also reflected in the dimension display. 

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Change the value of the highlighted fields with values as shown in the above figure. Appearance of dimensions&amp;nbsp; can be changed individually anytime directly to the object.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h5&gt;Style Setting
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/321Style.jpg" style="border: 1px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 250px; margin-bottom: 1em; height: 178px; margin-right: 1em;" alt="Style" align="left"&gt;
Style settings is used to change how the model is displayed on screen. Every aspects of display such line shape and color, background, ground and sky color, can be modified to your liking.
Normally, during adding and editing objects, we use one of the Default Styles. My style of choice during this stage is the Engineering style (sharp lines with white background)
Every other style is only used mostly during presentation or to create fancy printouts of your model. &lt;br&gt;The above picture uses one the available styles to make the model as if it were drawn by hand using pencil and stationary paper with a pretty hard
line strokes. Style settings does not affect objects’ attributes, other than their look on the screen.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Style.gif" style="margin-top: 0.5em; width: 220px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" alt="Change Dimension" align="right"&gt;
You can modify every element of a Style using &lt;em&gt;Styles Window&lt;/em&gt; than can be accessed from menu Window -&amp;gt; Styles. Regardless
of your style selection, during modeling, it is recommended we make objects look sharp and the line is not too thick. Change the Edge setting by clicking the highlighted symbol at the Edit Tab and make all other highlighted settings as shown in the figure.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Of course you can experimen with various settings to see which
one best suits your taste.&amp;nbsp; &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;




&lt;h5&gt;Saving Environment Setting Permanently&lt;/h5&gt;&lt;p&gt;The above modification applies only to your current model. If you create a new model, it will use the default template.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/SaveTemplate.gif" style="margin-top: 1em; width: 275px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em;" alt="Change Unit" align="right"&gt;If
you want to save this style setting permanently and to make it as the
default template then activate Save as Template window from menu &lt;em&gt;File&lt;/em&gt; -&amp;gt; &lt;em&gt;Save as Template&lt;/em&gt;. Change the content of the window similar to the following figure. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The default template will also store every existing object included in the model. I suggest that at this early stage you don’t delete the SANG character. &lt;/p&gt;&lt;h4&gt;Toolbar Docking
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;As mentioned previously, majority of our communication with SketchUp
is done through the toolbars. Various toolbars have been provided and
organized according to function groups.&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Toolbar-Prep.gif" style="margin-top: 1em; width: 275px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1em;" alt="Change Dimension" align="left"&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Initially, SketchUp only displays Getting Started toolbar. This toolbar is meant for introduction purposes only. It combines several different groups of functions into one toolbar. This toolbar should be replaced with more consistent grouping of toolbars
to make tools easier to find. For beginners, I recommend that only
some of this toolbars be displayed so as not too confusing. For a start, select toolbars shown in the above pictures to always show
using menu &lt;em&gt;View&lt;/em&gt; -&amp;gt; &lt;em&gt;Toolbars&lt;/em&gt;&amp;nbsp; and unselect &lt;em&gt;Getting Started toolbar&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;table style="text-align: left; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); margin-top: 1em; width: 480px; font-family: verdana; margin-bottom: 1em; font-size: 65%;" align="center" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt;

        &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Docking Toolbars&lt;/span&gt;

        &lt;br&gt;Normaly,
instread of floating, every toolbar is docked onto one side of the
Sketchup Screen. Any of the four sides of the screen can be used to
dock toolbars. My toolbars are arranged this way: Toolbar associated
with editing and construction are docked on the left side, while
toolbars associated with view are docked on the upper side the screen.
At the bottom side, I sometime dock toolbars that are rarely used such
as Shadow. &lt;br&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;p&gt;Now you are ready. Grab a drink! We'll be too busy very soon.&lt;/p&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt; 

&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;


&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-1387309523647359288?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/zqY2jcj3UD6ztkPemUAa2K3srZE/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/zqY2jcj3UD6ztkPemUAa2K3srZE/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/zqY2jcj3UD6ztkPemUAa2K3srZE/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/zqY2jcj3UD6ztkPemUAa2K3srZE/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/5LGt1rHSzfQ" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/1387309523647359288/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=1387309523647359288&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1387309523647359288?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1387309523647359288?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/5LGt1rHSzfQ/fresh-start.html" title="A Fresh Start" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/fresh-start.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DUUFQ386eyp7ImA9WxBQGEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-695362314498439718</id><published>2010-01-17T20:01:00.001+07:00</published><updated>2010-01-19T09:13:32.113+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-01-19T09:13:32.113+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="What is SketchUp" /><title>SketchUp in Home Building</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;
  &lt;br&gt;I use SketchUp extensively during the construction of my new house. Almost for every aspect of the construction, from designing to supervising. Some of the applications are:

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;ul type="circle"&gt;&lt;li&gt;Grand Design.
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Detailed Design and Technical Drawing
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Interior Design.
    &lt;br&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Grand Design &lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;I call it the Grand Design since I am planning to build the house in several stages to match with my budget. I need to have everything well planned so every stage will not look like unfinished building and no building material is wasted.
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The grand design is the final stage of the construction. I myself designed the house layout down to the placement &lt;img style="border: 1px solid ; margin-top: 1em; width: 250px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em;" alt="Grand Design" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/743576dc.jpg" align="left"&gt;of bathtub, toilet and walk in closet. To finalize the design, I ask a professional architect to give "the look" of the house by designing the roof and the façade. The architect also provides my with a better main stair placement so it is not only functional but it also blends with the interior nicely.

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The architect provide me with 3D design of the house but only in hardcopy, or pdf of the hardcopy. To have thorough understanding of all designs submitted by the architect, I always make a SkecthUp model of every design and send it to with comment to the architect (&lt;em&gt;if a picture is better than a thousand words, than 3D model at least 1001 times better right ..&lt;/em&gt;). Therefore, consultations can be done mostly by email since not much verbal communication is required. At the end of the consultation, Architect send me some 2-D AutoCAD files. This is the final input to the Grand Design.

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Structural Design and Dividing the construction into several Stages&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Based on the Grand Design, I ask a civil engineer to design the proper structure of the house. The structural design is required not only for obtaining building permits, but it also required to find alternatives on how to split the construction into several stages.
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;img style="border: 1px solid ; margin-top: 1em; width: 300px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;" alt="Struktur" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/728a06e8.jpg" align="right"&gt;From the structural design, it is determined that the house will be built in three stages. All structure that must be build at the first stage is identified in order not to compromise overall structure of the final design.

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Detailed Design and Technical Drawing
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;I prepare detailed designs and technical drawings for almost all aspects of the house construction. From detailed size of windows, doors, and architrave, placement of toiletries, to detailed design of staircases; even to the laying of tiles.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;img style="border: 1px solid ; margin-top: 1em; width: 200px; margin-bottom: 1em; float: left; height: 176px; cursor: pointer; margin-right: 1.5em;" alt="Tangga" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/ebe63651.png" border="1"&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;All of the detailed design and technical drawing is made as detailed and as accurate as possible. Some manufactures, such as &lt;a href="http://www.grohe.sg/" target="_blank"&gt;Grohe&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="http://www.grundfos.com/web/grfosweb.nsf" target="_blank"&gt;Grundfos&lt;/a&gt;, have already provided 3-D models in CAD formats for some of their products. They can be imported into SketchUp version 6.x/7.0.&amp;nbsp; Some manufactures, such as &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/cldetails?mid=886afdb19cf5a0e12e8ae34ac2aaf4f2&amp;amp;prevstart=0" target="_blank"&gt;Kohler&lt;/a&gt;, have already provided SketchUp models of their products in Google 3d Warehouse.

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Try Googling what you need or you can always make them on your own. The staircase above is a made according to specification from a handrail producer in Indonesia that I plan to use.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;SketchUp has the ability to simulate the movement of the sun for every minute of the day to study how the shadow fall to your building specific location. This is very handy to design how to get most out of the sunlight to your building and to keep away heat (this is important in tropical countries such as Indonesia) by adding plantation at specific locations or adding shade to Windows.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Plumbing Design
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;p&gt;I myself design the plumbing system. There are four groups of water piping: (a) water that goes straight up to a water reservoir system installed on a roof platform. (b) cold water to supply water from the reservoir system for all toilets and all the first floor water installation, (c) pressurized cold water and (d) hot water (trough a booster pump) for two main bathrooms. A looping pipe design is use to maintain pressure of the hot water supply. &lt;img style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.5em; width: 300px; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 0.3em;" alt="Plumbing" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/ad182679.png" align="right"&gt; &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Sound complicated? Not really, because I use &lt;a href="http://www.3skeng.com/" target="_blank"&gt;3skeng&lt;/a&gt; pluggin (free version, valid until April 2010). From the design I can determine all the piping accessories. The focus is on pressurized water piping that use relatively more expensive PEX pipes.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Determining Electrical Switches &amp;amp; Receptacles .
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Electrical design and installation is done by designated experts. What I make is just detailed drawing the location of all points for lamps, switches, receptacles and other electrical equipment. Hopefully no extension cord will ever be used in the house since to the receptacles of each room is pretty much in accordance with the IEE recommendations. From the drawing, electrical installations is designed and installed by experts.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;img style="border: 1px solid ; margin-top: 1em; width: 200px; margin-bottom: 1em; float: left; cursor: pointer; margin-right: 1.5em;" alt="Electrical" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/e61a988e.gif" border="1"&gt;I use &lt;a href="http://pewsth.panasonic.co.th/product/electrical/catlevel2/switch.html" target="_blank"&gt;Panasonic&lt;/a&gt; for switches and receptacles. This manufacturer sells their product as parts that can be self assembled according to your specification I define function for each switch and outlet and made SketchUp components based on relevant product part numbers. SketchUp can list all the part numbers and their quantity for your Shopping Lists. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Laying Out Tiles and Parquets
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In order to have the highest efficiency for floor covering while maintaining good design, all floor covering are modeled in details. Before buying any of the of tiles, I make a detailed measurement of the room and the tile and create a SkecthUp model for the specific room floor.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;img style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.1em; width: 320px; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-left: 0.3em;" alt="Tiling" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/779cefbd.png" align="right"&gt;I use dynamic components obtained from the Google 3D Warehouse. So designing the laying of tiles and parquets are quite easy. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The illustration shows the laying of 60x60cm tiles for my daughter bedroom. From the this model, I can calculate the number of tiles required and which part of the design that are more prone to damages due to cutting. So I can allocate some tiles for spare and avoid buying more than required. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;Technical Drawing&lt;/h5&gt;

&lt;p&gt;For fieldwork, I prepare technical drawing of each of design. It requires some getting used to for the field supervisor to work with 3-D drawings. However, with a little explanation, this obstacles can be easily removed. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Some technical drawing is also be done in 2-dimension like those produced by architects (Especially for works that is done by third parties.)&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;Interior Design&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;img style="border: 0px solid ; margin-top: 0.4em; width: 250px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em;" alt="Living" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/7a9eefee.jpg" align="left"&gt;I also use SketchUp to make some interior design such as: bedroom, bathroom, living room and kitchen, including kitchen and bathroom cabinets.

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The following picture is one example of the interior aspect I created then rendered using Kerkhythea.
  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;em&gt;There are many more aspects of home building that I do with SketchUp. It is more than likely that you will be able to do the same by learning from this blog. Trust me. But beware, it's addictive&lt;/em&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt; 
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-695362314498439718?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/6OkLixqo19MJ-FCN0xPCEz-0gnA/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/6OkLixqo19MJ-FCN0xPCEz-0gnA/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/6OkLixqo19MJ-FCN0xPCEz-0gnA/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/6OkLixqo19MJ-FCN0xPCEz-0gnA/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/kLIB0RjLBws" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/695362314498439718/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=695362314498439718&amp;isPopup=true" title="2 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/695362314498439718?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/695362314498439718?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/kLIB0RjLBws/sketchup-in-home-building.html" title="SketchUp in Home Building" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>2</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/sketchup-in-home-building.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DUQGRH4_fSp7ImA9WxBQGEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-1770317491949953404</id><published>2010-01-15T13:37:00.000+07:00</published><updated>2010-01-19T09:15:25.045+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-01-19T09:15:25.045+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Freebies" /><title>A Two Bedroom House at Grand Wisata, Bekasi</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Every now and then, I will post a 3-D model of building/object to give you examples and/or ideas what you can do with SketchUp. Although some detail might be omitted to save bandwidth, all shapes and dimension are maintained as realistic as possible. 
  &lt;br&gt;

  &lt;br&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;This is a model of a 75 square meter house on 162 square meter land&amp;nbsp; in one of the clusters at Celebration Town District, Grand Wisata Housing Project, one of the biggest housing projects Eastern of Jakarta. 
  &lt;br&gt;The model is created based on a promotional flyer&amp;nbsp; provided by the Developer. Apart from the floor plan, all shape and dimensions are all estimates based pictures provided in the flyer.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;This two bedroom house has a separate access to its service area that includes a small bathroom, a bedroom and a kitchen.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/p&gt;



&lt;br&gt;&lt;table style="margin: 1em auto; width: 90%; background-color: white; text-align: left;" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;

  &lt;tbody&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;
      &lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Freebies/e6c3aa38.jpg" style="width: 100%;" alt="Terasa" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;
    &lt;tr&gt;

      &lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: Verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;A 2 Bedroom House at Grand Wisata, Bekasi, Indonesia&lt;br&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
    &lt;/tr&gt;

  &lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;br&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Download the model from Google 3d Warehouse : &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/details?mid=56f2c661089f73ceb57b5db5ae875380&amp;amp;prevstart=0" target="_blank"&gt;Rumah Grand Wisata&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;br&gt;

&lt;br&gt;Enjoy!

&lt;br&gt;

&lt;br&gt;

&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;

&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-1770317491949953404?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/RoO-OHZBY7v8OlllKzYQSwGrdFo/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/RoO-OHZBY7v8OlllKzYQSwGrdFo/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/RoO-OHZBY7v8OlllKzYQSwGrdFo/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/RoO-OHZBY7v8OlllKzYQSwGrdFo/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/QH-rckl651w" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/1770317491949953404/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=1770317491949953404&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1770317491949953404?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/1770317491949953404?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/QH-rckl651w/two-bedroom-house-at-grand-wisata.html" title="A Two Bedroom House at Grand Wisata, Bekasi" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/two-bedroom-house-at-grand-wisata.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DU4CRH0zeCp7ImA9Wx9SGEo.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-7251872233730765819</id><published>2010-01-15T08:22:00.004+07:00</published><updated>2010-12-09T13:59:25.380+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-12-09T13:59:25.380+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="What is SketchUp" /><title>Getting to know Sketchup Free</title><content type="html">&lt;br&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
What is SketchUp&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Sketchup is a computer software to create 3D models (3-D) of
physical objects such as buildings, home appliances, landscapes, to
name a few. Architectural design is one of the applications of
SketchUp. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Before &lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwh/buildingmaker.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Google Building Maker&lt;/a&gt;, SketchUp was the only
software that is used to make 3-D buildings that you see on &lt;a
href="http://www.google.com/earth/index.html" target="_blank"&gt;Google
Earth.&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1.5em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 240px;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Recommendation&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: white; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Want to see some example&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt; of Sketchup models? &lt;/span&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;i&gt;What
about thousands of them&lt;/i&gt;. You can visit: &lt;br&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;a href="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img
alt="3DWH"
src="http://sketchup.google.com/3dwarehouse/resources/1620148765-logo.gif"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 30px; margin-top: 0.8em; width: 200px;"
target="_blank" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/a&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
to see thousands of examples of 3-D models that have been made by
individuals and companies. Everything can be downloaded for free. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Actually, Some 3-D modeling softwares have been around long before
SketchUp, particularly those that are developed for professionals such
as &lt;a href="http://www.autodesk.com/3dsmax" target="_blank"&gt;Autodesk
3ds Max&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="http://www.graphisoft.com/products/archicad/"
target="_blank"&gt;ArchiCAD&lt;/a&gt;, or those that are specifically targeted
at&amp;nbsp; home owners such as &lt;a href="http://www.punchsoftware.com/"
target="_blank"&gt;Punch Home and Landscape Design&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Before I was aware of SketchUp, I tried 3ds Max and found out that
it required a certain power of Graphic Cards (GPU) to run. Since this
has been always just for a hobby, I stopped trying any of those serious
3d modeling softwares. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Of course, each has its own advantages and disadvantages. Some are
not even comparable with Sketchup in term of sophistication. But all of
the above are paid softwares. Google offers us with a free SketchUp.
This definitely put more weight to our consideration to make SketchUp
as our weapon of choice.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Why SketchUp?&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;div style="margin-left: 2em; margin-right: 2em;"&gt;
&lt;cite style="color: rgb(204, 153, 51);"&gt;Kenapa harus Sketchup sih?
Bukannya ada yang lebih bagus? &lt;br&gt;
Yang lebih mahal ....... banyak!&lt;/cite&gt; &lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
It is Surprisingly Easy&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;What makes it stand out compared to other 3D modeling softwares
is&amp;nbsp; SketchUp modeling is accomplished by tools and techniques that
are very intuitive to use. It is almost like dealing with real physical
objects, but without physical barriers. No formula to remember, no
parameters to enter (We will talk about this later in this tutorial). &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Modeling in SketchUp is more like 'molding' than 'constructing'. For
example, if you want to raise the height of an object to match the
height of another object, simply select a surface and then pull it up
to the same height with the other object.&amp;nbsp; &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 100px;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Easy Modeling"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/dffe8cff.gif"
style="width: 250px;" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;It's soooooo
easy&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Wanting to make a hole on a surface, just create a circle on the
surface and push down its inner face as deep as you want, or pull it
up, if you want a cylinder shape protruding from the surface. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Lots of activities can be accomplished merely by mouse clicks and
drags, yet the results can still be accurate. (More details see here: &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/improving-model-accurary.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Improving Model Accuracy&lt;/a&gt;) &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;With such ease of use, we can concentrate more on designing and
turning our creativity into our model efficiently ... and having fun
while doing it. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Which is often considered as a challenge for new SketchUp users is
that everything has to be built&amp;nbsp; from scratch: line (edges) and
polygons (faces). In contrast, some home architecture softwares provide
you with objects like walls, columns etc.&amp;nbsp; None is available in
SketchUp. This was very confusing when I first tried SketchUp to model
a house.&amp;nbsp; This tutorial will show you that such challenge is very
easy to overcome. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;And lucky for us, we don't always need to build everything from
scratch because there are a lot of good Samaritans out there that
provide us with ready for use 3d models, from a chair to an airplane,
to add to our model for free.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Almost like Air, It is Free.&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Google provides a free version of SketchUp which can be downloaded
from the Internet. The software is absolutely free, so you don't need
to fear of&amp;nbsp; being raided by the policy for using pirated software.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;After SketchUp being acquired from @Last Software, Google
released a free version of SketchUp, along with the Pro version. Please
note that Google does not
restrict the use of Sketchup. There used to be a clause that "you can
use Google SketchUp for your personal and commercial use" but it seems
to have disappeared from the TOS. Therefore, my personal
interpretation, it still can be used for any purpose, including
for commercial purposes. For a hobby - in my opinion - we don't need
SketchUp Pro. (For more details see the difference at this &lt;a
href="http://sketchup.google.com/intl/en/product/whygopro.html"
target="_blank"&gt;link&lt;/a&gt;).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Some noticeable differences are:&amp;nbsp; In SketchUp (Free), we can
not easily make&amp;nbsp; scalable printout like those produced by
architects, and the free version has no ability to export (and import,
starting from version 7.1)&amp;nbsp; from/to standard CAD formats like .dwg
or 3ds. Things that we can live without. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;In summary, to create models like those we want to accomplish in
this
tutorial, what can be done by SketchUp Pro, can be also done by
SketchUp Free.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Notice that Sketchup Pro is a trialware, in the sense that it will
work as a fully functional Sketchup professional&amp;nbsp; version for 8
working hours and will turn into a free version after the 8-hour
expires.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
It is Ridiculously Good with Endless Possibility (.. sort of) &lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Of course "free" is not always a good reason enough for us to choose
anything. If you notice, some (Indonesian) national magazines/tabloid
that discuss home construction/renovation use SketchUp to model houses
discussed in their publications.&amp;nbsp; The results are very good and
can be quite accurate to a few points behind a coma (That is in
millimeters!).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Another uniqueness of Sketchup is its openness. Google provides
programming interfaces (APIs) so anybody can write a script (a
relatively simple programming language) to do things from a simple task
to a quite complicated operation as shown on this &lt;a
href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=FcpGwlfu3vU" target="_blank"&gt;youtube
video&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Surely you don't need to do this because many of such scripts (aka.
plugins) are free. As we can see at &lt;a
href="http://www.smustard.com/scripts/" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img
alt="Orbit" src="http://www.smustard.com/scriptimage.gif"
style="border: 0px solid ; height: 30px; margin-top: -0.9em; width: 252px;"
target="_blank" align="middle"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;,&amp;nbsp; at Smustard.com™, there are
lots of free plugins. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://www.kerkythea.net/joomla/" target="_blank"&gt;&lt;img
alt="Kerkythea"
src="http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/en/3/3f/Kt_logo_2_vector_copy.png"
style="border: 0px solid ; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.3em; width: 100px;"
target="_blank" align="right"&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Another aspect of 3d modeling is the
output. With the help of rendering softwares, you can produce photo
realistic pictures of your model. The limit is your artistic sense and
the speed of graphics processor you have (and / or a lot of waiting).
Because rendering software can take hours, even days, to finish,
depending on complexity of your model, textures and light setting. Free
rendering software that I sometime use is &lt;a
href="http://www.kerkythea.net/joomla/" target="_blank"&gt;Kerkythea&lt;/a&gt;.
Visit their site to see amazing examples how you can make your SketchUp
model into photo realistic pictures. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
It is Pleasantly Light on Your Hardware&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;p&gt;SketchUp does not require very sophisticated hardware specification,
unless you want to create complex 3-D model (High poly). For a
two-story house with 4 rooms, a regular notebook with 1GB of memory is
sufficient. (Aren't we all 'weekend architects " in this category?). &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Details about hardware and software requirements can be read in the
Chapter: &lt;a
href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/prepare-yourself.html"
target="_blank"&gt;Prepare Yourself&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
What is a SketchUp 3-D Model? &lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;A SketchUp 3d model is basically a set of polygons (edges and faces)
'stitched' meticulously to look like solid objects. So is with Circle
or Curve. Both are really just lots of small identical straight lines
arranged to appear like a Circle or an Arc. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1.2em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"
align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153); vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Scale of SketchUp Model&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
SketchUp models are always made with a 1:1 scale to its original size.
Sometimes a modeler make bigger scale than the original. This is
usually done for a model with high complexity and / or very small.
SketchUp is not accurate enough to create intricate models with a size
of few millimeters / centimeters only. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;A block of wood is composed from six square-shaped polygons attached
to each other and painted with wood pattern. A ball is composed of many
polygons of different shapes with each edge is hidden to appear like
having smooth curves. The more polygon we use (high poly), the more
realistic models will look, but also more burdensome to the processor
and graphics card. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;There is no point in Sketchup, literally. Sketchup only recognizes
edges and faces. Edges/Line will forms the boundary and faces make the
surface of a polygon.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Sketchup version 8 introduces solid objects. A Sketchup solid is any
3d model (component or group) that has a finite closed volume. A
SketchUp solid cannot have any leaks (missing faces or faces that do
not meet at an edge). However, Sketchup free does not allow you to
manipulate such objects, so this concept and its associated tools will
not be discussed in this tutorial.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
What SketchUp is Not.&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Most people will not classify SketchUp as a CAD (Computer-Aided
Design) software used for modeling 2-D / 3-D that demand for high level
of accuracy. SketchUp is very clumsy for 2D-modeling. &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;SketchUp basic purpose is for making 3-D models quickly (sketching)
and relatively accurate. SketchUp is not to create organic models such
as the human body. (However, there are plugins that can help us create
organic shapes such like this).&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Most of house 3d-models are formed by regular shaped objects like
rectangles, blocks, cylinders, curved profiles. Those are things that
can be done in SketchUp easily. Because our topic is to model a house.
we can definitely stick to SketchUp.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Happy Sketching&lt;/i&gt; &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-7251872233730765819?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Gq1AYE1pzzdPCNSzdzcKYJf_uMk/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Gq1AYE1pzzdPCNSzdzcKYJf_uMk/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Gq1AYE1pzzdPCNSzdzcKYJf_uMk/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Gq1AYE1pzzdPCNSzdzcKYJf_uMk/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/Lx6dhmvch2U" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/7251872233730765819/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=7251872233730765819&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/7251872233730765819?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/7251872233730765819?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/Lx6dhmvch2U/getting-to-know-sketchup-free.html" title="Getting to know Sketchup Free" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/getting-to-know-sketchup-free.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DUYESXg6eyp7ImA9Wx9TGU8.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-5587683642049778366</id><published>2010-01-14T19:47:00.002+07:00</published><updated>2010-11-28T13:51:48.613+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-11-28T13:51:48.613+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="General" /><title>Improving Model Accurary</title><content type="html">&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;.. accurate "no sweat" modeling ..&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SketchUp is not intended for engineering purposes that demand for
high accuracy modeling. However, it is accurate enough to make 3D
models
larger than a few centimeters. For the purposes of architecture
modeling, of course, SketchUp's level of accuracy is sufficient. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #ffcccc; text-align: center; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Warning&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Non Planar Face&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
SketchUp automatically creates a face when a set of lines make a closed
loop and are all in the same plane. &lt;br /&gt;
However, Sketchup also makes a little approximation that even when some
of the lines are a little off (not exactly in one plane), a face will
still be created. &lt;br /&gt;
This can be difficult when we try to do push &amp;amp; pull on the face.
The results can be messy or not possible at all. Using inferences will
avoid such problem. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
There are three aspects that determine whether models you create are
accurate:&amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;ol type="1"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Accuracy in measurements&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Accuracy of object positions&amp;nbsp; &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Accuracy of object slopes. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
SketchUp provides us with various information and techniques in the
form of &lt;i&gt;reference&lt;/i&gt; to another object and&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;inference&lt;/i&gt;
from existing objects or axis. This will facilitate the making of an
accurate model without always having to specifically enter dimensions
and slopes of objects being created/edited. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Accuracy in measurements&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Measurement Box&lt;/h5&gt;
The surest way to make accurate dimensions and slopes is using &lt;i&gt;Measurement
Box&lt;/i&gt;. Almost every object has its own set of parameters depending
on the current tools we choose (context
sensitive). Here are some
examples:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Measurement Box&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
As indicated in "&lt;a href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/fresh-start.html" target="_blank"&gt;A Fresh Start&lt;/a&gt;", Measurement Box is one the three
elements of SketchUp.&lt;br /&gt;
Notice that there is no blinking cursor to make input or to edit
value(s) in the input field.&lt;br /&gt;
There no other way to enter parameter(s) other than typing blindly
using the keyboard. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;ol style="list-style-type: lower-alpha;"&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
: [Length]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Rectangle&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/41184a40.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
: [Wide, Length]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Circle&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c36a627c.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;:
[Sides] [Radius]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Polygon&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/bf1d1da6.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
: [Sides] [Radius]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Arc&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/52bd14a6.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;;
[Sides] [Radius] [Bulge]&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Freehand&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c05b09bf.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;:
None&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
: [Length] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
: [Angle] &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;i&gt;Scale&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
[multiplier], or with the unit symbol, [Desired dimension]. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;div style="text-align: center;"&gt;
&lt;small&gt;[Bracket] indicates that you have
to press [Enter] after each entry.&lt;/small&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
Measurement Box is active only &lt;b&gt;&lt;i&gt;during&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/b&gt; an object
creation,
until we do another mouse operation. As long as we &lt;img align="left" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/MeasurementBox.jpg" style="height: 64px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 252px;" /&gt; have not done any other mouse operation, we can continue
changing the last entered parameter through the keyboard. The size (or
slope) of
the object will automatically change every time [Enter] key is
pressed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Scale Tool &lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Scale Tool&lt;/span&gt;&lt;img align="right" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png" style="margin-left: 1.6em; margin-top: -1em;" /&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
Scale tool is used to change the size of existing objects in the model
by dragging one on the available sliding points. &lt;br /&gt;
Combining Scale tool with [Ctrl] key will scale object from its
geometry's
center point.&amp;nbsp; Combination of Scale tool with [Shift] key will
scale the object with some uniformity. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Measurement Box can be used only during objects creation. For
existing
objects, change in size can only be made by changing object directly.
One of the methods is&amp;nbsp; by using &lt;i&gt;Scale&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/623adc9f.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;
in &lt;i&gt;Edit toolbar&lt;/i&gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When an object is selected using the Scale tool, there will be a
bounding box with several scaling points that can be selected and
dragged by the mouse.
There are 24 scaling points for 3-dimensional objects, and 8 points for
2-dimensional objects. as seen in the figure below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;img align="left" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/18e369d2.png" style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; margin-top: -0.75em; width: 60%;" /&gt;To get an accurate scaling, Scale tool must also be
accompanied by entering parameters through the Measurement box. There
are two ways to use Measurement Box with the scaling tool. First, by
entering a value as the scaling factor, second by inserting a value
complete with dimensional unit(for example: 125cm) in order determine
to final dimension of the aspect being scaled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Editing using Reference&lt;img align="right" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Toolbar-Accuracy.png" style="height: 167px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 142px;" /&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
I am not a fan of Scale tool because sometimes some aspects are not
completely controllable so that the result sometimes would not be as
expected. I prefer using one of the Edit tools and cutting and slicing
the object so that
elements of an object can be individually changed. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Referencing is the next best thing in SketchUp after Push/Pull. By
using references, we can make an object as accurate as possible
(dimension, location, slopes) and use the object as a reference to make
or to edit another object. This saves a lot of time.&amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;
Therefore, my work flow to create objects accurately is: Create
initial object(s) and maintain its accuracy using Measurement box, and
reference the object(s)&amp;nbsp; during creating/editing of subsequent
objects.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Reference to Another Object&lt;/h6&gt;
The most effective and efficient way to edit an object is by
referencing its
change to an existing object. If the referenced object is accurate,
then the edited object will also be accurate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/ObjectReference.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Push/Pull by
referring to other object&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
When pushing/pulling a face&amp;nbsp; of an object, we drag it to a new
position to lengthen/ shorten its overall size. &lt;br /&gt;
If we move the cursor to a face or any other point in another object to
use it as reference, the face being edited will be at the the same
plane with the referenced face/point. Again, this means that if the
reference is accurate, then the change we are doing to the object will
also be accurate. This is a time saver since we don't need type in any
value whatsoever to make it accurate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Redoing Last Operation to Another Object &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h6&gt;
Sketchup has the ability to apply one operation to separate objects
with identical result. This is done by double-clicking other object(s)
after an operation is completed with the initial object . The editing
operation can be
repeated as long as we do not select any other tool. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="left" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/RepeatOperation.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Redo
Operation
with Double Clicking&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
With double clicks, the same operation will be applied to all of the
objects. &lt;br /&gt;
So if the first editing operation is measured accurately (i.e. using
Measurement Box), all other operation will also be accurate &lt;br /&gt;
without having to make any entry with the Measurement Box. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The animation shows how we can repeat an OFFSET operation on several
face shapes. For each double clicking, another shape with the same
contour will be created exactly with the same distance from the
original edges. If we specifically entered a certain length with the
Measurement Box as the offset distance, then all the new shape will
also have the same accurate offset distance. This is how I often do to
make walls in SketchUp. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Adding &lt;i&gt;Guides&lt;/i&gt; with a Certain Distance from a Known
Position. &lt;/h6&gt;
Another method to ensure accuracy is to add guides in the form of
lines or dots to a model to be used as reference in &lt;img align="left" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Construction.png" style="margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; width: 142px;" /&gt;making changes or adding objects. The guide will be
positioned a certain distance from a known line/point in the model
(i.e. one of the Main Axis). &lt;br /&gt;
Guides is created using &lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/aaea97f4.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt; or&amp;nbsp; &lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
&lt;i&gt;Tape Measure&lt;/i&gt; tool is used to create a parallel guideline at
certain distance from another line, or to create a point at a certain
distance from another point. &lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;/i&gt; tool is used to
create a guideline with a specific angle to a line, (or two points)
that can be used as reference. Guides are usually removed immediately
after their use so as not to obstruct your view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/Guides-Accur.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating
"Guides"&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
The following animation shows examples how to&amp;nbsp; add guides using
the Tape Measure tool and Protractor tool to an object. Note that when
Protractor selected, the cursor changes into an arc /protractor shape.
The usage of this tool should also be followed by entries to the
Measurement Box to ensure accurate position of the guides. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Accuracy of Object Position &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
The easiest way to ensure accuracy of any object placement is to put
the object in reference to existing object (its midpoint, it's corner,
etc). If the referenced object has been positioned accurately than the
edited object will also accurate to that position. If there is no
object that can be used as a reference, of course, you can always make
Guides to place your object on the location of the guide. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Slope and Angle Accuracy. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h4&gt;
We could always set every slope(s)/angle(s) of an object using
&lt;i&gt;Protractor&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/Tool-Protractor.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt; as previously
discussed. Accurate but not too
practical. If you want to create a line that is parallel or
perpendicular to another line, it is much faster, yet still
accurate,&amp;nbsp; to utilize SketchUp's &lt;i&gt;Automatic Inference&lt;/i&gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="left" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: #ffff99; font-family: verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-right: 1.5em; margin-top: 1em; text-align: left; width: 210px;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="background-color: #99ff99; vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tip &amp;amp; Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Automatic Inferencing
color&lt;/span&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
By default, Black line indicates no inferencing is detected. &lt;span style="color: blue;"&gt;Blue&lt;/span&gt;, &lt;span style="color: red;"&gt;Red&lt;/span&gt;,
&lt;span style="color: green;"&gt;Green&lt;/span&gt; indicates that inference
is made parallel to one of the main axes. &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt;
and &lt;span style="color: cyan;"&gt;Cyan&lt;/span&gt; indicates parallelism,
tangent or perpendicular with a certain existing line. &lt;br /&gt;
Note that inferencing behavior is affected by your mouse clicking and
hovering. Some can make a certain inference fail to appear. &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Intelligently, SketchUp will always try to inform you whether your
drawing direction has a unique sloping characteristic (parallel,&amp;nbsp;
perpendicular or and tangent, or even equilateral) to one of the main
axes or another nearby line/curve in the model.&amp;nbsp; Therefore, if you
want to make an object which is parallel, perpendicular or tangent to
an existing object, or create equilateral triangle, we don't need to
use Protractor tool at all. With this automatic inference, 3D modeling
can be done easily and quickly, but still be able to maintain accuracy.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Parallel to one of the Main Axes&lt;/h5&gt;
Most of the time, Main Axes are the main references when
adding/editing an object. Therefore, it is advisable to always use them
as the axes of your model (most of lines are in the model are aligned
with one of these axes). Otherwise, main axes referencing may not as
useful. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/MainAxesReference.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Parallel to
one of
the Main Axes&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
When we want to make a&amp;nbsp; straight line with the &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;,
Sketchup will automatically indicate whether the line is parallel with
one of the existing axis. Black indicates the line does not align with
any of the axes. The color will change to the color of the axes it is
parallel with.&amp;nbsp; This is very useful, for example, when we want to
make a line perpendicular to the a floor, then we will move the cursor
upward until the resulting line turns &lt;span style="color: blue;"&gt;blue&lt;/span&gt;
and click at desired position. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Referencing to a line not parallel to any of the axes&lt;/h5&gt;
In addition to the Main Axis inferencing, we can also obtain
inferences from a curve or line that is not parallel to any of&amp;nbsp;
axis &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Parallel to another line &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h6&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/Parallel.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Parallel
another line&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Creating a line parallel to another line is accomplished by clicking
the starting point of the new line that we want to make&amp;nbsp; and then
hovering your mouse towards the midpoint of the line will be used as a
reference. This will induce inferencing from the line. Next slide the
mouse in the direction approximately parallel to referenced line.
Continue your line when the color turns into &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Continuing a sloping line. &lt;/h6&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/SlopingLine.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt; Continuance of a sloping line&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
During model creation, we often need to make shape as a continuance
of a sloping objects. For example we want to add eaves to the existing
roof. Instead of creating a new object using Rotate tool,&amp;nbsp; it is
far more quicker to create a&amp;nbsp; line with the same slope with the
roof. I.e. by determining the starting point&amp;nbsp; (end of the sloping
line) and then draw a line using &lt;i&gt;Line&lt;img alt="Sketchup tutorial" class="tools" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/ToolBars/c561f0d1.png" /&gt;tool&lt;/i&gt;.
Move your mouse in the
direction that approximately extending the slope and click only when
the line turns&amp;nbsp; &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
Finding other inferences. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Perpendicular to to an edge.&lt;/h6&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/Perpendicular.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Perpendicular
Line&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Making a new line perpendicular to another other line is
accomplished&amp;nbsp; simply by clicking at any point in the referenced
line as a starting point of the new line and and move the cursor to a
direction which is approximately perpendicular to that base line. Click
at the destination point only when&amp;nbsp; the resulting line turns
into&amp;nbsp; &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt;. That
indicates that is has a perpendicular characteristic to the starting
line. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h6&gt;
Tangent and Perpendicular with an Equilateral Triangle&lt;/h6&gt;
&lt;table align="right" border="1" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="2" style="background-color: white; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; margin-top: 0.5em;"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img align="middle" alt="Sketchup tutorial" src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/General/Accuracy/Tangent.gif" style="width: 280px;" /&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&lt;span style="font-family: verdana;"&gt;&amp;nbsp;Creating a
perfect curve&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/small&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
Automatic Inference will not always provide you with hints regarding
the inference made during an operation. I.e.. when you move your mouse
too fast. However, the inference color will always appear. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The animation shows the following when we use the Arc tool. The
first&amp;nbsp; &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt; inference
indicated that the starting and end point of the curve that will form
an equilateral triangle from a point located between the two sides.
Once we click that position, we will determine the curvature of the arc
we are making. The curve color is&amp;nbsp; &lt;span style="color: magenta;"&gt;Magenta&lt;/span&gt;
to indicate that the radius of the circle that forms the curve is
formed are tangent at the start and at end of the curve. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(&lt;span style="color: green;"&gt;...whew ... I need to brush up my
trigonometry know&lt;/span&gt;....)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;i&gt;Harrynov&lt;/i&gt; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-5587683642049778366?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Wuu0JOI9EwMeeq2QAXfXkX-nkyY/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Wuu0JOI9EwMeeq2QAXfXkX-nkyY/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Wuu0JOI9EwMeeq2QAXfXkX-nkyY/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/Wuu0JOI9EwMeeq2QAXfXkX-nkyY/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/MfjVI4hq99g" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/5587683642049778366/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=5587683642049778366&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5587683642049778366?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5587683642049778366?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/MfjVI4hq99g/improving-model-accurary.html" title="Improving Model Accurary" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/improving-model-accurary.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;DUQERHk-cCp7ImA9WxBQGEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-5297639890311280574</id><published>2010-01-14T07:12:00.000+07:00</published><updated>2010-01-19T09:15:05.758+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-01-19T09:15:05.758+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Welcome" /><title>How Do We Go About It?</title><content type="html">&lt;div style="color: rgb(127, 96, 0);"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;.. Just Do It ..&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;br&gt;&lt;p&gt;From my own experience in learning and teaching topics related to computers, computer knowledge will be more easily understood if we go straight with the keyboard (and mouse). Set a complete yet attainable goal and start with something small. During the process of achieving the goal, we learn various aspect of the application.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In this tutorial, the goal is to model a small house, and later will do some remodeling to the house by adding rooms and floors to the original model. Where do we start: Floor plan.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;What is the Plan?&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Here is what we are going to do. We'll start this tutorial by learning how to put your floor plan into SketchUp. From the floor plan, we will create floors and walls, add doors and windows, roofs and some other details. &lt;img src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/58745f85.jpg" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em; width: 45%;" alt="Explode" align="right"&gt; After the physical form of the house is completed, We would do some finishing work by adding material such tiling, paint, grass as you normally would to finish a home building. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;During the making of the model, we will gradually learn concepts, tools and techniques for making 3-D model using Google SketchUp for Windows. Certainly at this tutorial stage, the house should be quite simple yet detailed so we can utilize most of tools and technique available in SketchUp.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;In this scenario, this initial model is a two-room house on a 91 square meter land. At the end of this project, we will have a 3-D model of a small house that will look like this following: &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;div style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 75%;" alt="Awal" src="http://4.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/Sv1PF-aB83I/AAAAAAAAAEM/KjJA2vo3fvs/s400/122+Rumah+Awal2.jpg" align="middle"&gt;

&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p&gt;For those of you who are wondering whether this tiny house is only made conceptually to introduce you with SketchUp modeling. Nope, this is a typical building size in suburban housing projects all around Indonesia.&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Although the building is small, I have managed to make it as detailed as possible down to wall thickness, dimension of window/door frames, to approximate size of the tiles we use.&lt;/p&gt;



&lt;p&gt;We would assume that the the 3D model we just created as the house that in need for some additional rooms and facilities.&amp;nbsp; Because space limitation, the development will have to go upward by adding another floor. The final 3d model of the two-story house will look this following picture. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p style="text-align: center;"&gt;&lt;img alt="Target" src="http://3.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SwIETZTpcTI/AAAAAAAAAEU/18AMKmad00Y/s400/125+Rumah+Ahir.jpg" style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 75%;"&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;Later we will see how easy this is done using SketchUp. As easy as "pull it here, push it there ", seriously … &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;End Target&lt;/h4&gt;

&lt;p&gt;The end target end of this tutorial is to help you learn to make 3-dimensional model of the house you live in, and afterward how to remodel the house. I believe by the end of this tutorial, you will have all the skill you need to do this with SketchUp and show it off to your family and friends. &lt;/p&gt;

&lt;p&gt;&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/p&gt;

&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-5297639890311280574?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/l0U42AM3pLV0izdrkTyYQgSB6h8/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/l0U42AM3pLV0izdrkTyYQgSB6h8/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/l0U42AM3pLV0izdrkTyYQgSB6h8/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/l0U42AM3pLV0izdrkTyYQgSB6h8/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/2vm3rc4XueM" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/5297639890311280574/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=5297639890311280574&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5297639890311280574?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/5297639890311280574?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/2vm3rc4XueM/how-do-we-go-about-it.html" title="How Do We Go About It?" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><media:thumbnail xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/" url="http://4.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/Sv1PF-aB83I/AAAAAAAAAEM/KjJA2vo3fvs/s72-c/122+Rumah+Awal2.jpg" height="72" width="72" /><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/how-do-we-go-about-it.html</feedburner:origLink></entry><entry gd:etag="W/&quot;Ak4BQH09eCp7ImA9Wx9REEs.&quot;"><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-5972925987751959260.post-8975687622397880282</id><published>2010-01-13T11:22:00.001+07:00</published><updated>2010-12-11T19:02:31.360+07:00</updated><app:edited xmlns:app="http://www.w3.org/2007/app">2010-12-11T19:02:31.360+07:00</app:edited><category scheme="http://www.blogger.com/atom/ns#" term="Welcome" /><title>Planning to Model Your Own House?</title><content type="html">&lt;div style="color: rgb(127, 96, 0);"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;b&gt;.. or just wanting to
rearrange your furniture ..&lt;/b&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&amp;nbsp;
&lt;i style="color: rgb(180, 95, 6);"&gt;&lt;span style="font-size: large;"&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;br&gt;
Many of us want to make additions / changes
to the house we live in. From planning to add a room or two to adding
another
floor, or simply want to change the interior or the look of our house.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Whatever the reason, all have to start with a design. The easiest
way is to obtain services from experienced architects who will
explore your
needs and styles and translate them into
architectural designs. The more experienced the architect the more
expensive
the fee. However, the exploration of needs and styles is not easy.
Depending
on the communication skill of the architect and our ability to
articulate
thoughts.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Designing is Fun&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;img alt="Hard hat"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/hard-hat.png"
style="margin-bottom: 1em; margin-left: 1em; margin-top: 1em;"
align="right"&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Actually, designing is one of the most exciting parts of a home
remodeling project. (The least exiting: cost overrun)&amp;nbsp; Why not
do it yourself.&amp;nbsp; There are a lot of books, magazines out
there that you can use as references. Internet and Google will
overwhelm you with ideas. Or
just go to&amp;nbsp; some neighborhoods for some inspiration. Visit
websites
managed by architects.
Some housing projects provide you with detailed enough plans you can
adopt.
Most of all, who know you and your family better than yourself.
Moreover,
the amount of time you could spend designing may be far more than the
architects’
who must also work on other projects. What we need is a good and easy
to use tool to help us with the design
process.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;table
style="text-align: left; width: 210px; background-color: rgb(255, 255, 153); font-family: Verdana; font-size: 65%; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 1em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="2"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td
style="vertical-align: top; background-color: rgb(153, 255, 153);"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-weight: bold;"&gt;Tips and Trick&lt;/span&gt; &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td style="vertical-align: top;"&gt;&lt;span
style="font-style: italic; font-weight: bold;"&gt;Need for Expert Advices&lt;/span&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
It is necessary to have your house comply to building codes applicable
in your area. So you still need to consult with experts regarding
building structures, house safety, wiring and plumbing plan,etc &lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;p&gt;I'm not saying the architect is never needed at all. If you are
willing to
adopt someone else’s design, chances are you can do your own home
design.
If
you want to have a house that does not look like every other house in
the block, you need to get expert help. When I build a bigger house, I
asked for architects
help to do the retouching of my design. My intention was to have a
house façade which
was not attached to a certain era and yet not outdated. I love
minimalist
design but everybody is doing it. All of
the room layout that I created was adopted by the architect. For such
tasks, I
choose architect that was relatively more affordable.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Making&amp;nbsp; 3-Dimension (3-D) Model
&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Humans
are used to see objects with perspectives. In 3-D models, we can
maintain perspective
of object at every angle possible, compare objects to another object so
we can “feel”
its size and presence. Objects can be
evaluated with its surrounding. For example, if we want to make a small
lavatory under a
staircase we have to considers things such as the minimal height of the
lavatory ceiling, and the maximal height of the stair landing. We must
evaluate
how deep the floor must be recessed in order not to make the stair too
steep. You
will need a lot of two-dimensional drawings to be able to analyze this
comprehensively.&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;img alt="Maket Rumah"
src="http://i814.photobucket.com/albums/zz63/harnov/Tutor/Welcome/ScaleModel.jpg"
style="border: 1px solid ; margin-bottom: 0.5em; margin-right: 1em; margin-top: 1em; width: 50%;"
align="left"&gt;
There were times
that we could only make model house
using cardboard, toothpicks, plastic sheets, and some paints. If you
wanted to add objects to
the model, such as furniture, human figures, you had to look for
objects with the
same scale with the house. Not too easy a task. Some people can make
very
realistic model house as shown in the pictures. Drawback: difficult to
make,
not easy to modify, costly and need a
lot of time to finish. Not to mention prone to
damage by a flying ball.
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;Nowadays, we can make 3-D models with the help of computers. Today’s
home
computers are so
sophisticated that in general they can be used to create 3-D models
with ease.&amp;nbsp;&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;Too ambitious?&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;p&gt;The above story may sound "too ambitious". How could we – mere human
– who have
never studied architecture or
understand any CAD software – do that? It is hard .... if we don’t know
SketchUp. SketchUp will help you make
three-dimensional model with very good results, fast and easy. This
SketchUp tutorial will take you there, step by step.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;p&gt;SketchUp is very powerful modeling software
with very intuitive usage. Their motto once was "3D
for Every One". It is believed that the
learning curve is shorter than a more serious CAD such as ArchiCAD and
the
like.
With
such ease of usage, your creativity will not be handicapped by the tool
you
have. This is very important in designing
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;table
style="background-color: white; width: 200px; margin-bottom: 1em; margin-top: 0.5em; margin-left: 1.5em;"
align="right" border="1"&gt;
&lt;tbody&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;img alt="SUV"
src="http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/commons/thumb/7/73/Sketchupexample.png/300px-Sketchupexample.png"
align="middle" height="200" width="300"&gt;&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;tr&gt;
&lt;td&gt;&lt;small&gt;&amp;nbsp;A car made with SketchUp (Source: Wikipedia)&lt;/small&gt;
&lt;/td&gt;
&lt;/tr&gt;
&lt;/tbody&gt;
&lt;/table&gt;
&lt;p&gt;If you are not planning to create 3D models of organic shapes (such
as
human form), or other complex shapes (like the Sydney Opera House or
the car in
your garage) then the "SketchUp is exactly for you". If you want to add
stuff to your model (appliances,
trees, a gazebo, or even a plane), you just need to search it in the
internet. Chances
are, they have already been made. Most are free. In fact, Google
already hosts a
warehouse of 3d models for you to download and upload 3D models, free
of charge.&lt;br&gt;
&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;em&gt;Harrynov&lt;/em&gt;
&lt;br&gt;
&lt;br&gt;&lt;div class="blogger-post-footer"&gt;&lt;img width='1' height='1' src='https://blogger.googleusercontent.com/tracker/5972925987751959260-8975687622397880282?l=sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com' alt='' /&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/IAGU1Bv1LOOlSXs1R6MBUAlZEG4/0/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/IAGU1Bv1LOOlSXs1R6MBUAlZEG4/0/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br/&gt;
&lt;a href="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/IAGU1Bv1LOOlSXs1R6MBUAlZEG4/1/da"&gt;&lt;img src="http://feedads.g.doubleclick.net/~a/IAGU1Bv1LOOlSXs1R6MBUAlZEG4/1/di" border="0" ismap="true"&gt;&lt;/img&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;img src="http://feeds.feedburner.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~4/G5Qnzj3RQZQ" height="1" width="1"/&gt;</content><link rel="replies" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/feeds/8975687622397880282/comments/default" title="Post Comments" /><link rel="replies" type="text/html" href="http://www.blogger.com/comment.g?blogID=5972925987751959260&amp;postID=8975687622397880282&amp;isPopup=true" title="0 Comments" /><link rel="edit" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/8975687622397880282?v=2" /><link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://www.blogger.com/feeds/5972925987751959260/posts/default/8975687622397880282?v=2" /><link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://feedproxy.google.com/~r/SketchupTutor/~3/G5Qnzj3RQZQ/planning-to-model-your-own-house.html" title="Planning to Model Your Own House?" /><author><name>Harrynov</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/15893512193554607446</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail" width="32" height="28" src="http://1.bp.blogspot.com/_k1JOlWUNwsc/SytLV038AJI/AAAAAAAAAGo/g2J5y1s2UVM/S220/Logo+C.png" /></author><thr:total>0</thr:total><feedburner:origLink>http://sketchup-tutor.blogspot.com/2010/01/planning-to-model-your-own-house.html</feedburner:origLink></entry></feed>

